Professional Documents
Culture Documents
KH2020 Nucleus PDF
KH2020 Nucleus PDF
KH2020 Nucleus PDF
for the
NUCLEUS 3 RADAR SYSTEMS
PUBLICATION KH 2020
Original
May 2001
KELVIN HUGHES
Kelvin Hughes Limited
New North Road, Hainault, Ilford, Essex IG6 2UR, UK
Telephone: +44 20 8500 1020
Facsimile: +44 20 8559 8526
Telex: 896401
www.kelvinhughes.com
www.smiths-aerospace.com
CONFORMITY STATEMENT
This system has been designed to comply with IMO regulations and IEC standards.
COPYRIGHT
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
AMENDMENT RECORD
When an amendment is incorporated into this handbook, the details should be recorded below. If the equipment
has been modified, the modification number is shown on the Amendment instruction page.
No. Date Inserted Initials Mod No. Date Inserted Initials Mod
No. No.
1 Sep 01 DFB - 31
2 Oct 01 DFB - 32
3 Nov 01 DFB - 33
4 Nov 02 GJS - 34
5 Jul 03 CRB - 35
6 Sep 03 CRB 36
7 37
8 38
9 39
10 40
11 41
12 42
13 43
14 44
15 45
16 46
17 47
18 48
19 49
20 50
21 51
22 52
23 53
24 54
25 55
26 56
27 57
28 58
29 59
30 60
ELECTRIC SHOCK
RESUSCITATION
REMOVE OBVIOUS
1 SHOUT FOR HELP. SWITCH
OFF ELECTRICITY IF POSSIBLE.
2 REMOVE FROM DANGER. 3 OBSTRUCTION TO
BREATHING.
Do this immediately. If not possible, don't waste time Safeguard yourself when removing casualty from hazard. If casualty is not breathing start
searching for a switch. If casualty is still in contact with electricity, and the supply resuscitation at once.
cannot be isolated, stand on a dry non-conducting
material (rubber mat, wood, linoleum).
Use rubber gloves, dry clothing, length of dry rope or wood
to pull or push casualty away from the hazard.
CHECK PULSE
POSITION OF PULSE
15 Compressions of 80 per
minute followed by two
inflations
CONTINUE INFLATIONS
UNTIL RECOVERY OF
TWO FIRST AIDERS
NORMAL BREATHING
One conducts chest
compressions, without
pause at 60 per minute.
The other administers
mouth-to-mouth ventilation -
after each 5th compression
CONTINUE INFLATIONS
UNTIL RECOVERY OF
NORMAL BREATHING
May 01 iv Original
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
CD-0845
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS. LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WHEN THE UNITS ARE OPEN AND EXPOSED. BEFORE REMOVING ANY SUB-UNIT OR PCB, ALL
SUPPLIES MUST BE SWITCHED OFF.
WARNING
ENSURE THAT THE DISPLAY IS SWITCHED OFF PRIOR TO CLEANING THE SCREEN. OTHERWISE
STATIC BUILD-UP MAY PRODUCE ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES WHICH, IN EXTREME CASES, COULD
BE HAZARDOUS.
CD-0844
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH PRODUCE TOXIC FUMES WHEN BURNT.
Original v May 01
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
WARNING
DO NOT OPEN ANY OF THE EQUIPMENT UNITS WHEN THE RADAR IS OPERATIONAL.
ANTENNA ROTATION
ANTENNA ROTATION CAN BE HALTED BY SWITCHING THE DISPLAY TO STANDBY OR OFF.
SERVICING
THE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE SERVICED BY AUTHORISED AGENTS ONLY.
May 01 vi Original
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
Mains Voltage
All Kelvin Hughes equipment is supplied with Mains Voltage set for 220V, unless stated otherwise on
labels attached to the equipment.
S-Band Tuning
It may be necessary to re-tune the transmitter when changing the pulse length.
Picture Freeze
The rare event of Processor failure is indicated by non-operation of the trackerball, no update of screen data and
a frozen tune bar indicator. The radar picture may be updated, but plotting is not possible.
ARPA Failure
The ARPA computer is protected by a watchdog circuit, which monitors the ARPA for correct operation.
In the unlikely event of computer failure, the Operator observes vector footprints becoming detached from
targets. If this occurs, reset the computer, by pressing the Delete All Targets pushbutton twice.
If the ARPA fails while running, an ARPA FAILURE message is indicated. If the ARPA fails to start, a TESTING
ARPA message remains on the screen after the initial self-test period of 10 seconds.
CAUTION
Certain semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to
static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their
unterminated state, or sub-units containing these devices:
Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low voltage types with
earthed tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and
transported in anti-static bags.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
HL Heading Line
IR Interference Rejection
LP Long Pulse
MINIM Minimum
MP Medium Pulse
Amdt 5 ix July 03
KH 2020
CONTENTS
Preliminary Pages
Title Page
Conformity & Copyright Page
Amendment Record Page
Electric Shock Resuscitation
Warning Pages
Caution Page
List of Abbreviations
Contents (this page)
INTRODUCTION
OPERATING INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1 - OPERATING INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE & DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM INFORMATION
CHAPTER 7A - MKIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7B - MKV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7C - MKVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7D - MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA S-Band (As Required)
CHAPTER 7E - MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA X-Band (As Required)
Record Pages
INSTALLATION RECORD
DEFAULT SETTINGS
May 01 x Original
KH 2020
Contents (Introduction)
INTRODUCTION
Table of Contents
Page
Operation 1
Plotting Aids 1
Mapping 1
Display Types 1
Display Facilities 2
Range Scales 2
Screen Modes of Operation 2
Options (True Motion and Relative Motion with True Trails) 2
Offcentre 2
Heading Line 2
Variable Range Marker 2
Electronic Bearing Line 2
Signal Controls - Gain, Sea, Rain 2
Ownship and Plotting Parameters 2
Target Data 2
Parallel Index Lines 2
OPTIONS 3
Radar Plotting Aids 3
Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) 3
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) 3
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) 3
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Introduction)
ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
Figure 8 - Two Flat Panel Displays interswitched (via an RIU) with Two Upmast
Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna 11
Figure 9 - Two Flat Panel Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with Two Upmast
Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna 12
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
Original 1 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
DISPLAY FACILITIES Variable Range Marker
17 For information on how to select any facility on the 24 The Variable Range Markers (VRM1 & VRM2) are
display, refer to Chapter 1 - Operating Information. shown on the radar display as dashed rings (colour
coded; Green for VRM1 and Red for VRM2) and are
Range Scales available over the entire radar range. The VRMs ranges are
displayed by an alphanumeric readout in a box (colour
18 The PPI range scales are: 0.125nm, 0.25nm, 0.5nm, coded; Green for VRM1 and Red for VRM2), located in the
0.75nm, 1.5nm, 3nm, 6nm, 12nm, 24nm, 48nm and lower left-hand side of the screen.
96nm.
Electronic Bearing Line
Screen Modes of Operation
25 The Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL1 & EBL2) are
19 The following modes of operation and presentation are shown on the radar display as lines colour coded;
available for selection, depending on the type of (Green for EBL1 and Red for EBL2), emanating from
display installed: Ownship. The EBLs are True in North Up display mode and
Relative in Head Up mode. The bearings of the EBLs are
(1) Relative Motion, displayed as an alphanumeric readout in a box (colour
Relative Trails RM(R) coded; Green for EBL1 and Red for EBL2), located beneath
the VRM box.
(2) True Motion, Motion
True Trails TM(T) Modes 26 The EBL can be off-centred and the origin set to the
cursor position. This enables measurement of the
(3) Relative Motion, bearing of a target from a point other than the Ownship.
True Trails RM(T)
(4) Head Up. Signal Controls - Gain, Sea, Rain
(5) North Up. Presentation
27 The Gain facility sets the basic threshold level of the
Modes radar video displayed on the screen. The Sea facility
(6) Course Up.
reduces sea clutter returns and features an "AUTO"
(automatic) option. The Rain facility reduces clutter from
Options (True Motion and Relative Motion with True rain, snow and hail precipitation.
Trails)
20 True Motion (True Trails), TM(T) is available - where Ownship and Plotting Parameters
Ownship moves across the screen at a velocity
equivalent to the Ownships speed and heading. 28 Ownship and Plotting parameters are displayed in a
box (located on the right-hand side of the screen)
21 Relative Motion (True Trails) mode offers relative which contains Gyro, Heading, Speed, Set & Drift Input,
motion, fixed centred or off-centred Ownships Vector, Trails, CPA and TCPA.
position, with true trails.
Target Data
Offcentre
29 Target data is displayed on demand, for any selected
22 The display can be offcentred by up to 70%, on all tracked target, in a box located beneath the Ownship
range scales, except 96nm. and Plotting parameter data box.
May 01 2 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
OPTIONS SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
31 Refer to Chapter 8A for details of available Options.
41 The Nucleus 3 Display System can be configured in a
number of different ways.
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
42 Typical configurations include:
Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) (1) Single Display unit with single
Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna.
32 The Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) is a manual plotting
system equivalent to, but superior than, a reflection (2) T wo Display units with a single
plotter. Up to 20 targets can be plotted in all display modes. Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna.
EPA is fitted to all Relative and True Motion display systems.
(3) Two Display units interswitched with two
33 The operator manually selects and enters target plots, Transmitter/Receivers and Antennas.
and at regular intervals updates the plots by entering
the new position of the targets. 43 Some typical system configurations are shown in
Figures 1 to 10 on the following pages.
34 Refer to Chapter 2a for a full description of EPA
facilities. 44 As an Option, multiple Display units can be
interswitched with multiple Transmitter/Receivers and
Antennas. Information on Options is provided in Chapter 8.
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA)
35 The Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) is based on the
ARPA system and offers 20 target capacity. Trial
manoeuvre, target history and automatic acquisition are
excluded from the ATA facility. ATA performance is fully
compliant with IMO requirements.
36 The ATA utilises a computer which employs advanced
processing techniques to track targets automatically.
37 Refer to Chapter 2b for a full description of ATA
facilities.
Original 3 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
The following table contains a Summary of Data for all Nucleus 3 Displays
May 01 4 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
Range Data Minimum Range: Better than 30m on 10m2 target with * * *
short pulse, 4.5m aerial height and 4.5m waveguide.
Range
Discrimination: Better than 30m on 0.75 scale * * *
Range Ring
Accuracy: 1% of range scale in use or 10m,
whichever is greater. * * *
5 Map colours * * *
Original 5 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
May 01 6 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
Orientation: Landscape * * *
Original 7 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
Electrostatic
Damage: Provision for wrist strap point. * * *
May 01 8 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
Tx MONITOR UPMAST Tx
SIGNAL CABLE
GPS
LOG
110/220V
GYRO
CD-2111
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
25kW
X BAND
TRANSMITTER
NUCLEUS
6000
DISPLAY
GPS (OPTION)
LOG
GYRO
110/220V
CD-4614
Original 9 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
KELVIN HUGHES
GYRO GYRO
CD-4618
Figure 3- Two Displays interswitched (via RIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
SIGNAL CABLE
DUAL SYSTEM
INTERSWITCH
UNIT
LOG
SIGNAL CABLE SIGNAL CABLE LOG
GYRO
POWER CABLE POWER CABLE GYRO
GPS
GPS
110/220V KELVIN HUGHES KELVIN HUGHES
nucleus2 5000A
nucleus2
5000A 110/220V
CD-4615
Figure 4 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with a Single Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna
May 01 10 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
KELVIN HUGHES
GYRO GYRO
CD-4616
Figure 5 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
AERIAL POWER
220/440V 3 PHASE
GPS GPS
LOG LOG
CD-2105
Figure 6 - Two Displays Interswitched (via DIU) with Two Downmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
Original 11 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
Rx MONITOR TURNING
MECH
TRANSMITTER
S BAND
TRANSMITTER
AERIAL
POWER CABLE SOFT AERIAL POWER
START 440V 3 PHASE CO-AX
CONTROL CABLE UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE
POWER CABLE
BUFFER
24V SUPPLY AMP
CO-AX
220 / 110V
CD-2108
Figure 7 - Single Display with Single Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna, interfaced with Third Party Equipment
38-CORE
CABLE
AERIAL POWER CABLE
TRANSMITTER
INTERFACE
UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
REMOTE REMOTE
TRACKERBALL TRACKERBALL
12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE & POWER 12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE & POWER
NUCLEUS NUCLEUS
SPLIT PROCESSOR SPLIT PROCESSOR
LOG LOG
GYRO GYRO
DGPS DGPS
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
RADAR RADAR
ON-OFF ON-OFF
220VAC 220VAC
CD-4842
Figure 8 - Two Flat Panel Displays interswitched (via an RIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
May 01 12 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE AERIAL POWER 220/440V AC
3 PHASE CABLE SOFT
START
NUC DUAL SYSTEM UNIT
LEUS INTERSWITCH POWER CABLE NUC
7000 SIGNAL CABLE LEUS
DISP UNIT 7000
LAY DISP
SIGNAL CABLE LAY
POWER CABLE
40V MOTOR
POWER UNIT
(CZZ-A22)
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
REMOTE REMOTE
TRACKERBALL TRACKERBALL
NUCLEUS NUCLEUS
POWER CABLE POWER CABLE
SPLIT PROCESSOR SPLIT PROCESSOR
LOG LOG
GYRO GYRO
DGPS DGPS
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
RADAR RADAR
ON-OFF ON-OFF
220VAC 220VAC
CD-4841
Figure 9 - Two Flat Panel Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
Original 13 May 01
KH 2020
Index (Introduction)
Introduction Index
A P
ARPA 1,3 Parallel Index Lines 2
B Presentation Modes 4
Bearing Data 5 R
D Radar Plotting Aids 3
E Range Scales 2
G S
Gain 2 Screen Modes of Operation 2
I System Configurations 3
Interfacing: 6
T
M Target Data 2
Mapping 1 Target Trails 4
Mapping Facilities 5 True Motion (True Trails) 2
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Index (Introduction)
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Record Pages
INSTALLATION RECORD
TO BE COMPLETED ON INSTALLATION
RAD 1 : ....................................................
RAD 2 : ....................................................
HL 1 SKEW : ....................................................
Original 1 May 01
KH 2020
Record Pages
HL 2 SKEW : ....................................................
PERFORMANCE MONITOR:
TX : ........................................ nm
RX : ........................................ nm
DATE : ...............................................................
LOCATION : ...............................................................
May 01 2 Original
KH 2020
Record Pages
DEFAULT SETTINGS
SEA CONTROL 0 0 - 9 or A
Original 3 May 01
KH 2020
Record Pages
May 01 4 Original
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 1-3)
OPERATING INFORMATION
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS - OPERATING INFORMATION
Page
INTRODUCTION 1.1
Nucleus 5000/6000 Displays 1.1
Nucleus 7000 Displays 1.2
Colours 1.3
Radar System & Standby/Run 1.4
Functions - Standby Menus 1.5
Warning Set Up Screen 1.5
System Warning Alarm 1.5
Go To Test 1.6
Test Card 1 1.6
Crt Test 1.6
Clock Setup 1.6
Comms Setup Menu Screen 1.7
Ownship Setup 1.8
Curved Setup Screen 1.8
Go To Install Screen 1.8
Watch Monitor 1.8
FUNCTIONS 1.9
Amdt. 5 i July 03
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 1-3)
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS OPERATING INFORMATION Cont.
Page
July 03 ii Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 1-3)
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS - OPERATING INFORMATION Cont.
Page
CHAPTER 2a
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
Page
CHAPTER 2b
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
Page
INTRODUCTION 2b.1
CHAPTER 2b
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
Page
CHAPTER 3
INTERPRETING THE ppi DISPLAY & SART OPERATION
Page
INTRODUCTION 3.1
July 03 iv Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 1-3)
ILLUSTRATIONS
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS - OPERATING INFORMATION
Page
CHAPTER 2
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
Page
Figure 1 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario (At Start of Simulation) 2.5
CHAPTER 3
INTERPRETING THE PPI DISPLAY & SART OPERATION
Page
Amdt. 1 v Sep 01
KH 2020
Chap 1
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS - OPERATING INFORMATION
RADAR CIRCLE
NUCLEUS 3 5000
KELVIN HUGHES
PUSHBUTTONS
6000
NUCLEUS 3
PUSHBUTTONS DEGAUSS
O
O
I
I
ON/OFF
Degauss
22 Colour tones on raster type displays may be adversely
affected by changing magnetic fields. If the colour is
degrading, press the DEGAUSS pushbutton, located on the
right-hand side of the SCU (5000/6000 displays), to restore
the display to normal.
(2) Red Warnings, Electronic Bearing Line 2, (8) White Map Features.
Variable Range Marker 2, .
The Radar Colours
(3) Green Cursor/Measure, Electronic Bearing
Line 1, Variable Range Marker 1. 26 The colours used for Radar returns are:
(4) Navy Blue Box background (Functions). (1) Sepia Dim (weak).
(5) Grey Pop-down box background, box (2) Ochre Medium.
background (Information).
(3) Yellow Strong.
(6) Cyan Bearing scale, bottom/right box outline &
pop-down box outline. (4) Dark Grey Old trails.
(7) Royal Blue Highlight box. (5) Medium Grey Medium trails.
(8) White Text. (6) Light Grey New trails.
Day/Night Operation
27 The Background colour of the Display Screen and
Radar Circle change to Black when Night operation is
selected. All other colours are darkened.
CD-6027
Function
Run
28 The selected radar information is displayed on the
screen and all functions are available for selection.
(See Figure 2).
Standby
29 The display starts up in the standby condition. No radar
is displayed. The ARPA screens contain a set of
instruction boxes, as shown in Figure 3 below.
EPA screens contain [GO TO TEST] instead of [GO
TO SIM].
CD-4727
NOTE:
The TX IS (NOT) READY box, is only available if the Figure 3 - Standby Screen (with Interswitch & ARPA)
Radar is Master.
CD-1968
Reset
ACQ Select
Centre
CD-2475
SBY
CD-2026
CD-4729
NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for information on
CD-4728 Levels and Default Settings.
CD-4730
CD-4732
CLOCK SETUP
45 The clock is used for references to the time. This (2) Press and hold down any pushbutton, you can flip
facility is only available if the radar system is receiving through the options by moving the trackerball.
a ZDA message. To edit the clock setup: When the required option is selected release the
pushbutton.
(1) Place the cursor over the TXA box at the top-left of
the screen. A pop-down information box appears, (3) The same method of adjustment is applied with
as for the Printer Setup, press the centre the UTC Deviation (n) hours box, with a range
pushbutton to put the system into standby mode. from - 13 to +13 hours onto the given time.
(2) In the standby mode, placing the cursor over the (4) To exit from the menu, place the cursor over the
GO TO MENUS box and select by pressing any EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
pushbutton.
(3) In the next menu placing the cursor over the
CLOCK SETUP box and select by pressing any
pushbutton, the following menu appears:
CD-4731
COMMS SETUP MENU SCREEN 54 The Baud Rate Setup Screen can be accessed from
the Comms Setup Menu Screen, by selecting
49 Allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Four BAUDRATES. This displays the BAUD RATE SETUP
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports. Screen, as shown below.
50 Each of the following input message types can be
received on one or more of the 4 serial input comms Baud Rates Setup Screen
ports:
55 Allows the operator to set the transmit and receive
baud rates for each of the comms ports.
DPT, GGA, GLL, HDT, RNN, RTE, VBW, VHW, VTG, WPL,
ZDA, ZZU. 56 Each port can be set to transmit and receive messages
at a different Baud Rate, to allow for non-NMEA
inputs. The Baud rates can be set within the range 1200 -
38400 baud. For information on setting Baud Rates, refer to
Chapter 5 - Commissioning.
CD-4812
NOTE:
To adjust the settings for the Serial NMEA Input messages,
the Installation must first be "unlocked". CD-4734
CD-4735
OWNSHIP SETUP (7) The Stern Marker can only be turned ON when the
Ownship Graphic is ENABLED and is only
57 This facility allows Ownship to be shown on the radar displayed when the Range Scale in use is 3nm or
display in the correct dimensions and the antenna less. Once the Ownship graphic is enabled, the
correctly positioned in relation to the ship. Stern Marker can be turned ON by positioning the
cursor over the Stern Marker box and pressing
58 To edit the Ownship Graphics: any pushbutton. Pressing the pushbutton over the
box once again turns the stern Marker OFF.
(1) Place the cursor over the TXA box at the top-left of
the screen. A pop-down information box appears (8) To exit from the menu, place the cursor over the
below. Press the centre pushbutton to put the EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
system into Standby Mode.
(2) In the Standby Mode, place the cursor over the CURVED SETUP SCREEN
box GO TO MENUS box and press any
pushbutton. 59 The Curved EBL is an Electronic Bearing Line that
graphically displays the rate of turn or radius of turn
(3) From the new menu that appears place the cursor that the vessel will take to effect a new course. The turn
over the select the OWNSHIP SETUP box, and shown will include the ships forwarding distance.
press any pushbutton.
60 For information on setting-up the Curved EBL, refer to
(4) A plan view representative of Ownship is Chapter 5 -Commissioning.
presented.
GO TO INSTALL SCREEN
61 Selecting GO TO INSTALL from the Standby Menus,
displays the Installation Screen. This facility allows the
selection of the Transmitter Type, Display Type, etc. To
define the system configuration.
NOTE:
This is not an operator function and is usually set during
system commissioning.
62 For information on Installation settings, refer to
Chapter 5 - Commissioning.
WATCH MONITOR
63 This is used to alert the Operator that the integrated
bridge has not been used for a specified time period.
However, for this utility a particular connection is required to
the radar system. Refer to Chapter 5 for levels and default
setting information.
CD-4736
64 When there is inactivity exceeding the time period
specified in the setup, a Red Warning appears:
(5) To edit the length and the width of the ship, along
with the positioning of the antenna:
WATCH ALARM TRIGGERED MOVE TRACKERBALL
(a) Set switch SW1 to ON, place the cursor over
the dimension to be edited and press and CD-2031
(6) Enhancement of Radar Signals & Sector Scan. Zone 5 - Data and Menus
Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation 71 (1) Target Data Information.
68 (1) Gain, Sea, Rain Settings. (2) System and Function Warnings.
(2) Range and Rings. (3) Menus for VDU Facilities, WPt, NAV, PLOT,
MAPS, TRAIL, VDU.
(3) North Up.
Zone 6 -Cursor Control and Mode
(4) Course Up.
72 (1) Pushbutton Information Boxes.
(5) Head Up.
(2) Cursor Readout Mode.
(6) Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R).
(3) MISC Icon (when an Ergopod is
(7) True Motion, True Trails TM(T) (Optional). connected ONLY).
GAIN
TXA X MP PM 350 000 010 SEA RANGE 12 HDG 130 deg
340 020 RAIN RINGS 2
L.SPD 16.5 KT
330 030 North up
Correlator Centred COG ---
SC/SC 320 040
RM(R) SOG --.-
VIDEO 310 HL STAB SEA
NORM 050
OFF SET SEA
DRIFT SEA
300 060 T. PAST POSN OFF
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
T. VECTOR 15 min (R/T)
070 T. TRAILS 3 min (R/T)
290
CPA LIMIT 2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT 20.0 min
ZONE 5
100
260
TRACKERBALL PUSHBUTTONS
CD-6026
PULSE LENGTH (MP/SP/LP) BOX- SELECTION 81 Compare the range measurement with the reference
figure taken on installation: A fall of more than 20%
indicates a need for transmitter maintenance.
74 Shows the pulse length in use. With the cursor Receiver Performance:
highlighting the box, a pop-down selection box
appears as shown below. The middle pushbutton sets the 82 Select the 1.5nm range scale (X-Band receivers only,
pulse length to automatic (normal) setting. Left and right for S-Band select the12nm range scale) and measure
pushbuttons select a shorter (SP) or longer (LP) pulse the range of the sun using the cursor readout.
length respectively, where allowed.
83 Compare the range measurement with the reference
figure taken on installation: A fall of more than 20% on
an X-Band, or 80% on an S-Band (due to the S-Band monitor
being more sensitive to changes) indicates a need for
maintenance.
NOTE
CD-4737 Refer to the Installation Record, for details of the reference
figures.
Displaying SART Responses (3) Fast ships generate high relative target speeds
that will reduce target correlation; therefore to improve the
86 To detune the receiver, for displaying clear SART target update rate a faster scanner should be fitted.
responses, tune the radar as described above to
achieve minimal radar targets. Ensure that the receiver is VIDEO BOX
re-tuned for normal operation.
88 Displays the video mode normal or enhanced. With
the cursor highlighting the video box, press any
pushbutton to toggle between NORM and ENH.
CD-4739
NOTE:
In excessive sea clutter or precipitation, the use of
enhanced video mode may reduce target visibility. A
combination of longer pulse length or video enhance,
adjusting SEA/RAIN and CORRELATOR SC/SC produces
better target visibility.
CD-4740
as shown below. Pushbutton functions are as detailed in the MOTION MODE (RM (R)) BOX
zone 4 description.
95 Displays the motion mode in use. With the motion
mode box highlighted, the left pushbutton sets the
motion mode to True Motion with True Trails (TM(T)). The
middle pushbutton sets the motion mode to Relative Motion
with Relative Trail (RM(R)). The right pushbutton sets the
motion mode to Relative Motion with True Trails (RM(T)).
CD-4744
CD-4741
RANGE/RINGS BOX
92 Displays the range scale in use and the distance (in
nm) between the range rings displayed (or OFF). With
the range/rings box highlighted, the left pushbutton changes
range scale down. The right pushbutton changes range
scale up. The middle pushbutton toggles the range rings on
or off.
CD-4742
93
The Range can be set between 0.25 to 96nm. The
Rings are set between 0.025 to 16nm, depending on
the range scale in use.
HL OFF BOX
96 Removes the heading line and all other graphics
(EBLs, VRMs, footprints, sectors etc.) from the PPI.
With the HL off box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton to restore the graphics
to the screen. Figure 5 shows the screen with normal
graphics, before HL OFF is activated and Figure 6 shows the
screen when HL OFF is active.
CD-4746
CD-4745
CD-4750
101 With the set box highlighted and the stabilisation mode
set to manual, press and hold any pushbutton while
NOTE: moving the trackerball through the north/south axis to
On initial switch on the master gyro heading may be change the angle.
incorrect. See glossary.
NOTE:
L SPD BOX SPEED If an external stabilisation source is selected, the set value
will be automatically updated (non-EU mode only).
98 Displays Ownship speed and its source. With the SPD
box highlighted, the left pushbutton selects LOG DRIFT BOX TIDE RATE
speed (L SPD). The middle pushbutton selects manual
speed (M SPD). The right pushbutton selects Doppler (W or 102 With the set box highlighted and the stabilisation mode
G SPD) (optional) or VTG input (optional, non-EU mode set to manual, press and hold any pushbutton while
only). moving the trackerball through the north/south axis to
change the tide rate.
CD-4749
CD-4751
99 If manual speed is selected (see below), the middle
pushbutton is then used to change the speed. With the NOTE:
SPD box highlighted press and hold the middle pushbutton If an external stabilisation source is selected, the drift value
(Adj). The speed may be increased/decreased by moving will be automatically updated (non-EU mode only).
the trackerball in the north/south axis respectively.
CD-4748
PAST POSN BOX PAST POSITION CPA LIMIT BOX CLOSEST POINT OF
APPROACH LIMIT
103 With the past posn box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton while moving the trackerball through the 107 Displays the current CPA limit. With the CPA limit box
north/south axis to increase/decrease the time setting highlighted, pressing and holding the left pushbutton
respectively. while moving the trackerball through the north/south axis will
adjust the CPA limit value between 0.1nm and 6.0nm. The
middle button selects the minimum CPA limit (0.1nm). The
right pushbutton selects the maximum CPA limit (6.0nm).
CD-4752
CD-4753
CD-4756
CD-4754
FUNCTIONS ZONE 4 114 As soon as an EBL has been activated the cursor
moves to the PPI and controls the active EBL. EBL
NAVIGATION & CLUTTER INFORMA- bearing is controlled by the trackerball. The left pushbutton
TION acquires a target at the cursor position, the middle
pushbutton deselects the EBL and the right pushbutton turns
off the EBL. A typical EBL is shown below.
VRM BOX VARIABLE RANGE MARKER
111 Displays the current range of the VRMs. With the VRM
box highlighted, the left pushbutton toggles the green
VRM on or off. The right pushbutton toggles the red VRM on
or off.
CD-4757
ERBL ACTIVATION
115 Pressing the right pushbutton anywhere inside the
radar circle will activate both an EBL and a VRM and
allow control of both via the trackerball. A displayed EBL and
VRM can be selected simultaneously by positioning the
cursor over the dot where the VRM and EBL intersect and
pressing the middle pushbutton.
GAIN/SEA/RAIN BOX
116 Displays the current setting of the Gain, Sea and Rain
controls. With the Gain/sea/rain box highlighted,
holding down the left pushbutton and moving the trackerball
through the north/south axis will increase/decrease the Gain
setting respectively.
CD-4828
117
Similarly, holding down the middle pushbutton while
moving the trackerball through the north/south axis will
increase/decrease the sea clutter level respectively. Rapidly
CD-4758
moving the trackerball in the south axis will enable Auto Sea
mode. Auto Sea mode is disabled by rapidly moving the
trackerball in the north axis.
118 Holding down the right pushbutton while moving the
trackerball through the north/south axis will
increase/decrease the rain setting respectively.
119 Settings for Gain, Sea and Rain are:
FUNCTIONS ZONE 5 DATA AND 122 To activate waypoint display, the radar must have a
valid lat/lon position; otherwise, attempts are ignored.
MENUS Press the left or the middle pushbutton; if any waypoints
have been received, they will be displayed in the PPI
WPT BOX whenever they are within the current radar range. If no
waypoints have been received, the following warning box
120 Allows the operator to display waypoints and routes if appears:
they have been received. When the WPt box is
highlighted, a pop-down menu details the operation of the
pushbuttons. NO WAYPOINTS
RECEIVED
CD-2018
Clearing Waypoints
123 Waypoints are cleared with the right hand pushbutton
option. To ensure that waypoints are not cleared
CD-4760
accidentally, the operator is required to confirm his action.
The following warning box is displayed:
Activating Waypoints
CLICK AGAIN
121 With waypoints inactive, the pushbutton selection
boxes are shown below: NOW TO CONFIRM
ACTION
CD-2020
CD-4761 124 The right pushbutton must be pressed again within five
seconds to clear the waypoints.
127 To access the navigation menu, with the NAV box 130 With the radius box highlighted, holding down either
highlighted, press any pushbutton. The following the left or the middle pushbutton, while moving the
option boxes are displayed: trackerball through the north/south axis will change the curve
radius of the EBL.
131 To deactivate the curved EBL, with either the heading
or the radius box highlighted, press the right
pushbutton.
CD-4762
128 With the curved EBL box highlighted, pressing any WOP Box Wheel Over Point
pushbutton activates the curved EBL. The following
menu appears: 132 With the WOP box highlighted and the curved EBL
active, press any pushbutton. Press again to
deactivate.
CD-4763
CD-4766
END Box Exit the NAV Menu 142 To open the VDU menu, with the VDU box highlighted,
press any pushbutton and the following menu appears.
137 To exit the NAV menu, with the END box highlighted,
press any pushbutton.
CD-4771
PLOT MENU
143 The contents of the plot menu are dependent on the
radar plotting aid fitted and are described in chapter 2.
CD-6028
AISc - AIS plots which have CPA and TCPA both within
the limit displayed (i.e. dangerous plots).
Loading a Map
UP
CD-5122
DOWN
(4) Maps can be loaded from or to another Nucleus
display, provided that the I/O ports are setup to
STORAGE LEVEL enable this facility. When a Map is loaded from
INDICATION another Nucleus Display, the "LOADING MAP"
CD-4772
message will be displayed on both screens.
NOTE:
146 A Map Storage Level indication is provided along the Setting up the I/O ports is done within the Maps Setup
bottom of the MAPS menu. If the Map storage Menu, via the Comms Setup Menu screen. For further
becomes full a MAP STORAGE FULL warning message is information, refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning (see
displayed and some stored Maps may need to be removed to Serial Message Setup Screen) .
create space for new maps.
Saving a Map
147 To load a map:
148 Position the cursor, using the trackerball, on the MAP
(1) Scroll the map selection by positioning the cursor
No. Under which the map is to be saved. Press the
on the Up or Down arrow (located on the
centre pushbutton to save the map, the following warning
right-hand side of the Map Directory box) and then
box is displayed:
press and hold down any pushbutton and rotate in
the North/South axis until the required map
appears.
(2) Position the cursor inside the Map Directory box SAVING MAP
on the map required, the map is now highlighted,
and then press the left-hand pushbutton. The
message "LOADING MAP" is displayed below the CD-2011
MAPS Menu, as shown below.
NOTE:
If the Map is already in the Directory, the warning box
displays the message CLICK AGAIN NOW TO CONFIRM
ACTION.
CD-5121
151 Press the pushbutton again, the map is now deleted. (2) Selection of the Change Style pushbutton
produces the following menu, position the cursor
on the required selection and press any
Moving the Current Map (True Maps Only) pushbutton.
152 With the MOVE box highlighted, pressing and holding
the left pushbutton while moving the trackerball will
reposition the map. Pressing the middle pushbutton, as Current Line
shown below, will reset the map to its original position. Type Selected
for Drawing
END
CD-2001
Current Colour
Cyan Grey Red Green White Red Selected
for Drawing
CLEAR MOVE END
CD-2532
NOTE:
If a feature is to be placed at a designated Lat/Lon
co-ordinate, place the feature at the required Radar display
position using the Lat/Lon readout.
Current Line
TP ! Current Symbol
Selected
Type Selected for Drawing
for Drawing
END
CD-2006 END
CD-2636
CD-4778
Audible Alarms
167 To switch audible alarms on or off, with the AUD box
CD-4775
highlighted, press any pushbutton. Signified ON by a
red border around the AUD box, as shown below.
Contrast & Brilliance Adjustment
161 To adjust either the contrast or brilliance: with the
appropriate box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton while moving the trackerball through the
east/west axis.
NOTE: CD-4779
To increase contrast and brilliance levels without entering Exiting the VDU Menu
the VDU menu, simultaneously press and hold all three
pushbuttons. 168 With the END box highlighted, pressing any key will
exit the VDU menu.
Video Levels Adjustment
NOTE:
162 With the SET VIDEO LEVELS box highlighted, press Moving the cursor inside the PPI will automatically close
any pushbutton. the VDU menu.
CD-4776
CD-4777
FUNCTIONS ZONE 6 171 Select the specific location by pressing and holding the
middle pushbutton. The cursor box becomes outlined
BUTTONS & TRACKERBALL in red, indicating that the range & bearing information shown
INFORMATION is now relative to the chosen location.
172 Move the cursor to the desired location. The range and
CURSOR BOX bearing is shown in the cursor box.
CD-4780 CD-4781
PUSHBUTTON MENU
Electronic Tape Measure
173 Displays the current action assigned to each
170 Position the cursor over the location to be chosen as pushbutton.
the first reference point in the PPI.
CD-4783
ERGOPOD ICON
174 The Ergopod Icon is displayed at the bottom of the
screen (below the 160 degree marker at the edge of
the PPI, as shown in Figure 7). The icon shown below can be
either red or green, denoting port or starboard Ergopod
control (optional).
CD-4781
CD-3070
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
TARGET
B
CD-1975
Video Enhance
CD-1976
Interference
CD-1977
CD-2486
STABILISATION MODE
Excess Sea
AUTO SEA
221 The auto facility provides automatic suppression of
clutter. Further fine adjustment can be achieved using
the Gain control.
222 The auto mode operates efficiently in open sea and in
estuaries, though some land detail may be suppressed
(leading edges are preserved). RACON responses may be
reduced, but at least part of the response is normally visible.
223 The auto facility is effective against sea and close rain
clutter.
CD-1991
CURVED EBL
232 An electronic bearing line that graphically displays the
rate of turn/radius of turn that the vessel will take to
effect a new course. The turn shown will include the ships
forwarding distance. (Refer to paragraph 128).
(3) Short, Medium, Long Pulse. Zone 4 - VRM, EBL and Signal Controls
(4) Tuning of the selected Radar & Performance (1) Variable Range Marker.
Monitor.
(2) Electronic Bearing Line.
(5) Correlation & Interference Rejection.
(3) Gain Setting.
(6) Enhancement of Radar Signals & Sector Scan.
(4) Sea Setting.
Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation
(5) Rain Setting.
(1) Range and Rings.
Zone 5 - Data and Menus
(2) Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R).
Target Data Information.
(3) True Motion, True Trails TM(T) (Optional).
(2) Menus for VDU Facilities, MAPS, TRAIL,
(4) Relative Motion, True Trails RM(T) (Optional). PLOT,NAV and WPt.
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 5
ZONE 4 ZONE 6
CD-4843
CHAPTER 2A
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID (3) To update the plot, position the cursor over the []
symbol of the target, press the SELECT
pushbutton (centre), the [] symbol flashes to
INTRODUCTION acknowledge selection. Now reposition the cursor
over the present position of the target and press
1 Manta displays are provided with one of three radar the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, a vector is
plotting aids: generated representative of the target course
(CRSE) and speed.
(1) EPA - A Manual Electronic Plotting Aid.
(4) Release the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton. The
(2) ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid with manual vector origin will move at a course and speed
acquisition and a limited subset of ARPA predicted from the two previous plots. It is
functions. recommended that the LEADING EDGE of the
target is used for a plot entry or update, to ensure
(3) ARPA - A comprehensive Automatic Radar consistent plotting.
Plotting Aid with manual and automatic acquisition
and including all ARPA functions. NOTE:
2 This section covers the Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA). Vectors are normally relative if in the Relative Motion
RM(R) mode and true if in the True Motion TM(T) mode.
3 The specification for the Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA)
is provided at the end of this Chapter. (5) Further plots on the target are made by repeating
4 The EPA is a manual plotting system equivalent to, but sub-paragraph (3) . The previous plot symbols
superior than, a reflection plotter. Up to 20 targets may and vector flash to acknowledge selection.
be plotted. Reposition the cursor over the present target
position and press ACQ (Acquire), the previous
5 The operator enters an initial plot at a target position, vector disappears and a new vector is generated.
followed by a second plot some minutes later (typically
(6) If the vector deviates from the target track,
3 to 6 minutes). The two plots are used to calculate the target
reposition the cursor to select the target and press
true course (CRSE), speed, CPA and TCPA, and to
the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, the vector is
generate a vector. The calculation and vector are ONLY
recalculated using the new data.
based on the previous two plots.
(7) To display target data, position the cursor on or
6 The vector origin is RATE AIDED and therefore moves near to the vector origin and press the SELECT
at the predicted course (CRSE) and speed of the pushbutton. The plot symbols and vector flash,
target. Should the vector deviate from the target, it may be target data is displayed in the Target Data box on
that the target has manoeuvred. If Ownship changes course the right-hand side of the screen. The range and
or speed, relative vectors instantly indicate the changes in bearing of a target plot is displayed if selected and
CPA and TCPA status. Whenever any target manoeuvres only the initial plot has been entered.
(vector leaves target) a plot update is required.
NOTE:
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID CONTROLS Following the selection of SELECT, the target vector and
plot symbols will flash. Careful selection of the pushbutton
NOTE: - APPLIES TO EU MODE ONLY functions is advised as the options are: CANCEL ENTRY,
ACQ or DELETE PLOT.
An operator warning is displayed if the target is not
updated for 10.5 minutes. The target is automatically
deleted and the warning cancelled if a new plot is not (8) The vector presentation mode can be reversed by
acquired within 11.5 minutes. pressing and holding the VECTOR MODE
pushbutton, to display true vectors when the
7 To plot a single target and obtain target data proceed
equipment is in the Relative Motion RM(R) mode
as follows: and relative vectors when the equipment is in the
(1) Position the cursor over the target, press the ACQ True Motion TM(T) or Relative Motion RM(T)
(Acquire) pushbutton (left-hand) a plot symbol [] mode.
appears over the target position. Release the
ACQ pushbutton. NOTE:
Releasing the VECTOR MODE pushbutton within 4
(2) Target data, other than Range and Bearing seconds allows the vectors to return to the normal mode.
(BRG), is not available until the initial plot has
been updated. The equipment accepts an update
8 Changes in range scale, Off-centering, Relative or
immediately after the entry of the next plot and
True Motion or stabilisation mode (NORTH UP,
target data is shown.
COURSE UP, HEAD UP) does not result in any loss of plots.
Vectors correspond to the motion selected.
(2) Position the cursor over the 2nd target, press the (4) Course & Speed (True).
ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, a plot symbol [] (5) Closest Point of Approach (CPA) & Time to
appears over the 2nd target position. Move the Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) or Bow
cursor to the next target. Crossing Range (BCR) & Bow Crossing Time
NOTE: (BCT).
(1) When two or more targets are close to one another, 14 EPA tracking is available on a radar visible target out
careful selection of the correct plot is required. to the maximum range of 96nm.
(2) If difficulty is experienced, and the wrong plot is
selected, position the cursor over the symbol for the correct Selection
plot and press the SELECT pushbutton, the symbol/vector
flashes. Now move the cursor over the new position of the 15 To display data in the Target Data box:
target, press the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, the new vector (1) Position the cursor over the selected target to be
is now generated.
tracked and press the centre pushbutton (Select).
Deleting Plots 16 The elapsed time is calculated between successive
target returns and a vector generated on the display to
10 To delete plots proceed as follows: represent the predicted course and speed of the target.
(1) Target Plots selected in error may be deselected 17 Target information appears in the Target Data box as
provided the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton has not follows:
been pressed. Press the SELECT pushbutton to
correct the error. TARGET XX Target Number
(2) The vector of any one target can be deleted by updated XX.X mins ago Time since last update
positioning the cursor on the vector origin, T.BEARING 056.00 Bearing (T) or (R)
pressing the SELECT pushbutton and then
pressing the DELETE pushbutton. RANGE 3.3 nm Range in nautical miles
T. COURSE 349.0 Course in degrees
Vector Time T. SPEED 2.7KT Speed in knots (KT)
11 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The CPA or BCR 3.2nm Closest Point of Approach
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the (nautical miles) or Bow
target, e.g. target speed of 12 knots (KT) = vector length of Crossing Range
three nautical miles. TCPA or BCT 2.2min Time of Closest Point of
Approach (minutes) or Bow
12 The vector time may be changed between 1 and 30 Crossing Time
minutes by selecting the VECTOR function and then
operating the trackerball in the vertical plane to increase or
decrease the time shown next to VECTOR in the pop-down 18 To delete a target plot, position the cursor close to the
box. selected target and press the select pushbutton, then
press the delete pushbutton.
Selection (2) If the range in use is less than the guard zones
range then the zones do not operate until the
20 To select the Plot menu: range scale is increased.
(1) Highlight t he PLOT box and press any (3) The Operator must note that WHAT HE SEES ON
pushbutton. The Plot menu boxes appear in the THE SCREEN IS WHAT THE GUARD ZONES
lower right-hand corner of the screen as shown SEE.
below.
Fixed Guard Zone
HIST OFF LABELS
22 The Fixed guard zone is preset between 5.5nm and
BCR/ 6nm (i.e. Outside the sea clutter field).
CPA 23 To activate the Fixed guard zone, select the [GUARD]
function in the PLOT menu. Press any pushbutton and
DEL ALL GUARD END the Fixed and Variable guard zones appear on the screen at
CD-2072
5.5nm and 6nm respectively. Press the right-hand
pushbutton (Vari OFF) to turn off the variable guard zone.
Plot Menu (EPA System) Press the left-hand pushbutton (Zones Active) to activate the
guard zones. The centre pushbutton (Guards OFF) deletes
fixed and variable rings.
(2) To change the ON/OFF state of the Plot History
facility, highlight the [HIST] box and press any NOTE:
pushbutton. (1) Subsequent operation of the pushbutton turns the Fixed
(3) To delete all plots, Highlight the DEL ALL box. guard zone off, and the guard zone ring is cancelled.
Press any pushbutton to delete all plots. A warning
(2) Targets are acquired and marked with a symbol when
box is displayed; CLICK AGAIN NOW TO the Guard Zone is activated, further plotting is to be carried
CONFIRM ACTION. out manually by means of SELECT and ACQ (Acquire) for
(4) T o select B ow Crossing Range / T ime each target.
(BCR/BCT), the displayed target information is
changed. BCR/BCT data replaces CPA/TCPA.
Variable Guard Zone
(5) To change Target Data Function:
(a) Highlight the BCR/CPA box. 24 Activation of the Variable Ring guard zone is automatic
when the Fixed guard ring is turned on. The Variable
(b) Press any pushbutton to change the functions Ring guard zone appears on the screen at the default
CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT. initialisation range of 7nm to 7.5nm.
CPA/TCPA is replaced with . . . 25 The Variable Ring guard zone can be positioned at any
BCR/BCT readings in the ranges of : range from 0.5nm out to 40nm.
-99.9 to +99.9nm 26 To change the Variable guard ring range, move the
.- after +/-99.5min trackerball to anywhere on the ring (not at the ends)
and press the SELECT pushbutton. Movement of the
(6) To enable the Labels facility: position the cursor trackerball then changes the range. Pressing SELECT again
over the LA BELS box and operate any fixes the new range.
pushbutton. The box outline highlights in red - the
LABELS facility is enabled. To disable this facility
position the cursor over the LABELS box and
operate any pushbutton.
(7) To leave the Plot menu, highlight the END box
and press any pushbutton.
27 The port and starboard bearing limits of both the Fixed (3) The cursor is automatically placed in the TRIAL
and Variable guard zones default to 45 relative to MANOEUVRE box and the pop-up boxes and the
Ownships heading line. Pushbutton Selection box [3] contain the
following:
28 To change the bearing limits:
(1) Select the PLOT menu and Guard function.
Adjust Adjust
(2) Move the trackerball to either end of the Variable Course Speed
guard zone (i.e. port or starboard) and press the
SELECT pushbutton. CD-2071
Selection NOTE:
Whenever any target manoeuvres (vector leaves target) a
30 Before selecting the trial manoeuvre function, target plot update is required.
vectors should be set to relative so that the results of
an intended course/speed change can be assessed more When two or more targets are close to one another, care
accurately. must be taken to select the correct plot.
31 To select the Trial Manoeuvre menu:
(1) Highlight t he T RIAL box and press any
pushbutton.
(2) The CPA/TCPA boxes are replaced as shown
below.
COURSE KT
SPEED deg
CD-2070
The following Table provides a list of EPA features and a description of each.
PLOTTING MODE Relative Motion (After second plot it is possible to select either True or Relative vector).
GROUND REFERENCE NOT APPLICABLE
VECTOR FACILITIES Vector Mode: Target vectors displayed in Relative when True Motion selected and vice
versa.
Minimum lapsed time between any two plots: greater than 30 seconds.
PLOTTING ACCURACY Course Tolerance: 50
Speed Tolerance: 1 kt.
Closest Point of Approach Tolerance: 0.1nm
Time to Closest Point of Approach Tolerance: 2 min.
TARGET SPEED Targets plotted up to relative speed of 75 knots maximum.
OWNSHIP SPEED 99.9knots maximum.
OWNSHIP RATE OF TURN 12 degrees per second maximum.
TARGETS ON A BEARING Up to maximum No. of target plots allowed.
PAST POSITION Past plots may not be equally spaced, but vary according to the Operator controlled manual
plotting interval
TARGET FADING/ PLOT LIMIT After 10 minutes a warning is issued for any plots not updated.
Any plot with a time between plot updates exceeding 15 minutes is removed.
RADAR ANTENNA RATE Up to 60rpm (limited by system)
RADAR SIGNAL From digitized video (set by operator for GAIN, RAIN, SEA CLUTTER)
TARGET CORRELATION Correlation by target identification and predicted position.
TRIAL MANOEUVRE Ownships manoeuvre simulation in speed and course
SIMULATION(S) Single-scenario - Manually generated targets to assess the consequences of an intended
change of course or speed of Ownship, enables avoiding action to be taken.
TEST DIAGNOSTICS NOT APPLICABLE
CHAPTER 2B
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
3 The specification for the Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) (8) Lost Target - When a target is lost, the red
is provided at the end of this Chapter. warning box produces a WEAK ECHO
SEARCH alarm message and a Lost
4 The Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) is based on the Target symbol (see right) is placed on the
ARPA System and offers a 20 target capacity. Trial display at the last known position of the target. If
Manoeuvre, Target History and Auto Acquisition facilities are the Target is of interest, and after 10 sweeps the
excluded from the ATA. The ATA performance is fully Target has not been found, the Alarm message
compliant with the IMO requirements. LOST TARGET is displayed. If the Target is not
of interest, i.e. the range is greater than 3 nautical
5 The ATA utilises a computer, which employs advance miles, has a negative TCPA and is outside the
processing techniques to track targets automatically. forward 45 either side of the Heading Line, it is
deleted.
6 The ATA provides the following facilities:
(9) Tracking Overload - An alarm indicates
(1) Target Acquisition - Target with relative speeds
attempted acquisition of the 21st target and
of up to 150 knots (KT) can be acquired out to a requires that one or more targets should be
range of 80nm. Up to 20 targets can be acquired
released from tracking.
manually.
(10) Interfacing - Target data (ATA tracked targets)
(2) Guard Zones - Two guard zones are available,
outputs are available, in IEC 61162 TTM format
one preset and one variable. When a target (which
and as a feed to a serial printer.
has not previously been acquired) enters a guard
zone, an alarm is given and the ATA automatically (11) Automatic Identification System (AIS) -
acquires the target. Adjustable 50 plot capacity.
(3) Tracking - Acquired radar visible targets are
automatically tracked to a range of 80nm and Options
vectors are generated, which indicate the course
(CRSE) and speed of the target. all acquired 7 As detailed in the Introduction section of this manual.
targets can be labelled and data on true target
course (CRSE), true speed, range, bearing
(BRG), BCR/BCT, CPA and TCPA can be
displayed.
10 Position the cursor on the target and press the [Select] 17 ATA Alarms, listed below, are displayed in a RED
highlighted box on the right-hand side of the screen. If
pushbutton, press the [Delete] pushbutton and the
the ATA computer is not available the following message is
tracking/plotting on the target ceases. Targets causing a
displayed:
collision warning cannot be deleted until acknowledged.
NOTE: THE ATA
Ensure that the correct target, map or navigation line or
symbol is selected before pressing the DELETE COMPUTER HAS NOT
pushbutton.
BEEN FITTED
Vector Mode
CD-2077a
11 Change the vector presentation mode by positioning
the cursor in the Vector menu; press and hold the [T. or
R. Mode] pushbutton for 4 seconds. The Vector box is 18 With the ATA functioning, warnings produce an
outlined in red to indicate that vectors are displayed in the audible alarm and the following alarm messages may
opposite presentation mode to that of the display, plus a Red be displayed in the highlighted box:
Warning box as below. To return the Vectors to the correct
(1) Collision Warning
presentation mode repeat the procedure. This function is not When a target is
available in Trial Manoeuvre mode. within both CPA and TCPA, a flashing symbol is
generated on the target plus TARGET DATA.
VECTOR MODE
(2) Weak echo Search
SET TO TRUE When a target is lost
this message appears and is always shown until
CD-2073 the target is deleted.
Vector Time (Vector Length) (3) Lost Target
If a target is not seen
12 The vector time can be changed between 1 and 30 for eight consecutive scans the target is counted
minutes, in increments of 1 minute, by pressing and as weak and the Lost Target symbol appears in
operating the trackerball in the vertical plane to increase or the last vector position. If the target is of interest,
decrease the time shown next to VECTORS in the after a further 10 sweeps the target is designated
OWNSHIP DATA field. as Lost and an Acknowledge box appears above
the warning box.
13 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the (4) Tracking Overload
target (e.g. target speed 12 knots (KT) then vector length is Occur s when the
3nm, which is the distance the target travels in 15 minutes). computer is tracking to maximum capacity and
any additional target is acquired.
(5) ATA Failure
If the computer fails
after initialisation.
(2) An information display on the target selected then (4) A maximum of 4 past positions only are displayed
appears on the right side of the display. This for each tracked target.
shows target information, as does target tote, but
can only display it in this way one target at a time.
34 To execute the tote mode:
(1) Place the cursor in the TOTE box, located over to
the top-right of the target information display,
press any of the pushbuttons to activate.
(2) The initial target information display is replaced by
the Target Tote display. This shows information
on the speed/course (CRSE),range/bearing
(BRG), T CPA/CPA and BCT/BCR of six
independent targets.
(3) To switch between the different data types:
(a) Place the cursor over the bar at the top of the
target information display. An information box
appears below the radar display:
Range 15 miles
Bearing 350
Speed 16 kt Range 12 miles
Course 160 Bearing 030
Speed 12 kt
Course 270
60 minutes
60 minutes
Own Ship
Speed 10 kt
Course 000
Relative Motion
North Up
CD-0089
60 minutes
Figure 1 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario (At Start of Simulation)
AUTOMATIC RADAR PLOTTING AID (4) Footprint Acquisition Zones - Provided to allow
automatic acquisition over a defined area around
Ownship.
INTRODUCTION (5) Tracking - Acquired radar visible targets are
automatically tracked to a range of 80nm, and
36 The specification for the Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
vectors are generated which indicate the course
(ARPA) is provided at the rear of this chapter. (CRSE) and speed of the target. All acquired
37 The Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) facility targets may be labelled, and data on true target
complies with and greatly exceeds the IMO course (CRSE), true speed, range, bearing
requirements for an Automatic Radar Plotting aid. Up to 50 (BRG), BCR/BCT, CPA and TCPA may be
targets can be tracked and acquired, automatically or displayed.
manually. (6) Vector Mode - Provides the facility of true vectors
38 Automatic acquisition options include twin Guard when the display is in the RELATIVE motion
Zones, Sectors (Not EU) and Footprint Acquisition mode, and relative vectors when the display is in
Zones (FAZ). The ARPA performance is fully compliant the TRUE motion mode.
with the IMO resolutions A422 and A823 for ARPA. (7) Target History - Displays a target track history,
39 The ARPA computer employs advanced processing showing 4 past positions for each target,
techniques to acquire and track targets automatically. representing 2 minute intervals.
Data on all tracked targets can be transmitted via an RS232 (8) Reference Targets - Tracked targets may be
serial link to a navigation system, plotter or terminal. A designated as Reference Targets and used for
second RS232 serial link provides an external diagnostic ground stabilisation.
facility. Radar Operator controls are similar to those
described in Chapter 1, any variations are described in this (9) Autodrift - Drift is automatically calculated using
chapter. the average movement of designated Reference
Targets or using data from a navigation system
40 The design of the ARPA computer includes software (e.g. GPS).
and hardware components that minimise the effects of
error sources on tracking accuracy and also minimise target (10) Anchor Watch - All designated Fixed Targets are
swap. However, as with all tracking systems, error sources, monitored for movement relative to Ownship, and
such as excessive clutter or poor signal to noise ratio, have a if any one target moves in excess of the Anchor
detrimental effect on accuracy. The following describes the Watch limit, the ANCHOR WATCH alarm is
effects of error sources on ALL ARPA tracking systems: triggered.
(1) Low signal - to - noise - Targets may appear to (11) TCPA/CPA LIMIT - The limits define the time and
fade on the display. The ARPA may indicate a closest point of approach of a target that triggers
WEAK ECHO alarm and, in extreme cases, lose the COLLISION WARNING alarm. The target
the target. Other echoes appearing in the track must violate both parameters to trigger the alarm.
window during this period may be assumed to be TCPA LIMIT may be varied between 1 and 60 min.
the required echo. in 1 minute increments, CPA LIMIT may be varied
between 0.1 and 6.0 nautical miles in increments
(2) Low signal - to - clutter - Clutter returns and of 0.1 nautical miles. The default values are 15
echoes may merge on the display. This may cause minutes and 1 nautical mile.
the ARPA to malfunction during this period,
possibly by not detecting a manoeuvre, or by (12) BCR/BCT - Once data is available on a target the
losing vector stability. bow crossing range and time may be requested.
(3) Side lobes/reflections - Particular settings of the (13) Trial Manoeuvre - Simulates the intended
display, or poor siting of the antenna may cause change of course (CRSE) or speed to assess
the ARPA to lose accuracy, particularly in its ability planned action in advance either for navigational
to determine the true bearing of the echo, and purposes or when a potential collision situation
hence the CPA. exists.
41 The ARPA function provides the following facilities: (14) Simulation - Provides both a training and test
facility, the standard simulation is based on a
(1) Target Acquisition - Target with relative speeds known solution. The known solution is the basis for
of up to 150 knots (KT) can be acquired out to a testing the integrity of the ARPA computer.
range of 80 nm. Up to 50 targets may be acquired
either manually, using the cursor, or automatically (15) Lost Target - When a target is lost, the red
using guard zones. Auto acquisition is also warning box produces a WEAK ECHO
possible by sectors or Footprint Acquisition Zones SEARCH alarm message and a Lost
(FAZ). Target symbol is placed on the display at
the last known position of the target. If the Target
(2) Guard Zones - Two guard zones are available, is of interest, and after 10 sweeps the Target has
one preset, the other variable. When a target, not been found, the Alarm message LOST
which has not previously been acquired, enters a TARGET is displayed. If the Target is not of
guard zone, an alarm is given, and the ARPA interest, i.e. the range is greater than 3 nautical
automatically acquires the target. miles, has a negative TCPA and is outside the
forward 45 either side of the Heading Line, it is
(3) Zone Acquisition - Fourteen sectors are deleted.
available, either inclusion or exclusion, ships
head or north stabilised and can be stored.
(18) Drift Input - Three modes of drift input; Manual - SET TO TRUE
True motion models only 0-99.9KT, GPS -
Ownship vector calculation (GPS Fitted) and Plot - CD-2073
Delete 51 The default values are 15min (TCPA) and 1nm (CPA).
(2) Lost Target - The resetting of the alarm 71 Select [SIM] from the standby menu then press the
automatically removes the Lost Target symbol centre pushbutton.
from the display.
Scenario 3 - Fifty Target Simulation
(3) Anchor Watch - Alarm cancelled by reset action;
the anchor symbol may be removed by reselecting 72 This scenario can be used for the testing of Polyzones.
the target. It consists of a grid of targets all of which are travelling
away from Ownship. Refer to Annex A for a detailed
(4) Tracking Overload - Alarm cancelled by reset
description of targets course (CRSE), bearing (BRG), speed
action; one or more selected targets have to be
and initial range.
deleted to allow for selection of new target.
(5) New Target - Reset by acknowledgment of the Selection
alarm.
73 Select [SIM] from the standby menu then press the
(6) ARPA fault - Return to Standby and reselect [GO right-hand pushbutton.
TO RUN].
Terminating the Simulation
74 To terminate the simulation facility, select the
[STANDBY] function highlighting the TX box, then
press the centre pushbutton.
Range 15 miles
Bearing 350
Speed 16 kt Range 12 miles
Course 160 Bearing 030
Speed 12 kt
Course 270
60 minutes
60 minutes
Own Ship
Speed 10 kt
Course 000
Relative Motion
North Up
CD-0089
60 minutes
PLOT MENU (3) To reset the ARPA computer and to delete all
plots, position the cursor in the DEL ALL box, the
box is now highlighted. Press any pushbutton to
Function reset the computer and to delete all plots.
75 Provides a selection of functions: Guard zone
A highlighted box appears with the words:
activities, i.e. switching ON/OFF and setting Variable
zone range and bearing (BRG); Deleting all plots and an
Electronic ARPA computer reset facility; Selecting Bow
Crossing Range (BCR) or Closest Point of Approach (CPA) CLICK AGAIN
also contains selection of Reference Targets and Sectors. NOW TO CONFIRM
The Labels function applies labels to the targets. The menu
also contains END which exits the menu. ACTION
Selection
76 To select the Plot menu: Sector Selection (Not EU)
CD-4767
Ref. Target
CD-2075
77 To operate the Reference Target function:
(1) Select a target on the Radar screen, highlight the (3) A Sector Storage Level indication is provided
REF TGT box, the pop-down menu reads; Fix, along the bottom of the Sector Selection menu. If
Unfix, Anchor. the Sector storage becomes full a SECTOR
STORAGE FULL warning message is displayed
(2) Press the appropriate pushbutton to Fix (Unfix) and some stored Sectors may need to be removed
the selected target. An R appears on the selected to create space for new sectors.
target and the Drift Input changes to Fixed
Target. If Anchor Target is selected the R is (4) To load previously saved sectors, scroll the
replaced with an anchor in a box, and the Drift selection box until required sector appears.
Input changes to Anchor Watch. When the limit is Highlight the sector and press the left-hand
violated, the Red Alarm box contains the words: pushbutton.
(5) To create a sector, highlight [Create] and press
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM any pushbutton. A dotted inclusive/exclusive
sector appears on the display, the information
menu states: Plot, Select. Press the centre
ANCHOR WATCH pushbutton to select that Sector. The following
menuRings
appears:
Active
CD-2081
Zones De- Rings
NOTES: Active Select FAZ
Off
(1) After the Anchor Alarm has been acknowledged, the
target reverts to a reference target. If Anchor Watch is still CD-1958
Drawing Polyzones
82 To draw the polyzones:
(1) Place the cursor over the desired starting point on
the radar display. Three new information boxes
appear below the radar display:
Guard Zones
Drop Delete
90 The operation of the Guard function is fully described
CD-1954 in Paragraphs 75 to 82 - GUARD ZONES.
(4) When the shape of the side being edited is correct, Target Data
press the centre pushbutton.
91 To change Target Data information:
Deleting Polyzones
84 To delete a polyzone: CPA/TCPA is replaced with BCR/BCT readings in the
ranges of : -99.9 to +99.9nm
(1) Select the required polyzone and then press the .- after +/-99.5min.
right-hand pushbutton .
(1) Highlight the BCR/CPA box, the box is now
85 Three options exist when the polyzones have been highlighted.
created:
(2) Press any pushbutton to change the state of
(1) To save the configuration of polyzones selection.
(2) To clear the configuration of polyzones
Labels
(3) To exit and return to the previous menu area.
92 To enable the LABELS facility:
NOTE:
Save the configuration if possible, as creating the (1) Highlight the LABELS box and operate any
polyzones can be time consuming. pushbutton. The box outline highlights in red - the
LABELS facility is enabled. To disable this facility
Saving Polyzones position the cursor over the LABELS box and
operate any pushbutton. Target labels are
86 To save a polyzone: numbered 1 to the maximum target capacity. The
numbers of deleted or lost targets are not used
(1) Position the cursor over an empty file space in the until the maximum number is reached.
file selection area. Three information boxes
appear below the radar display: (2) Selection of Labels ON identifies the target labels.
(3) To leave the Plot menu, position the cursor in the
END box and press any pushbutton.
Load Save Delete
CD-1951
TRIAL MANOEUVRE 100 The trial manoeuvre functions in True motion TM(T),
Relative motion RM(T) and Relative motion RM(R)
{For modes. In Relative motion, a TRIAL COURSE LINE radiates
COURSE deg from Ownship to indicate the proposed heading.
SPEED KT {Information
101 In True motion TM(T), Ownships vector is displayed
DELAY min {Only along the heading line, then turns onto the TRIAL
CD-1943
COURSE. The DELAY TIME is defined as the time from the
initialisation of the delay period to the time that Ownship has
completed the manoeuvre.
(3) The cursor is automatically placed in the TRIAL 102 Collision targets in Trial mode are designated with a
MANOEUVRE box and the pop-up boxes and the triangle symbol.
Pushbutton Selection boxes [3] contain the
following:
SPEED 16.5 KT
270 090
DELAY 3.0 min
ALARM BOX
260 100
E PLOT 3 ONLY
TARGET 1
250 110 Updated 0.9 mins ago
T BEARING 039.3 (T)
RANGE 3.3 nm
240 120 TCSE 349 (T)
TSPD 2.7 KT
OFF CPA 3.2 nm
VRM nm 230 130 TCPA 2.2 min
OFF CURSOR
OFF 220 TRIAL 140
EBL deg 8.70 nm WAY Pt NAV
OFF 210
150
212.9 (T)
G R PLOT MAPS
S A 200 160
A
7 E 3 0 190 170
I
N A
I
N
180 TRIAL VDU
CD-6025
107 Targets are in 5 rows of 10 columns, with Ownship in 109 This numbering system is arbitrary and is merely to
the centre of the grid. Ownship has a heading of 0000 allow identification of the target echoes used in the
and a log speed of 10KT. simulation. The ARPA may not necessarily adopt this
numbering sequence.
108 Target 1 is specified as top left corner, i.e. row 1,
column 1. Target 50 is bottom right (5, 10). Target 110 All values in the following table are nominal, with no
numbering is sequential, returning to the beginning of the decimal precision given. Deviations may be up to + 1.0
next row when at the end of the current row, i.e. target 11 is indicated units, i.e. 10 may be in the range 9.0 to 11.0.
row 2, column 1.
Target Number True Bearing True Course True Speed Range at Start
1 294 340 15 10
2 300 344 14 8
3 309 350 14 6
4 323 355 14 5
5 345 355 13 4
6 12 360 13 4
7 34 4 12 5
8 49 10 12 6
9 59 12 13 8
10 65 16 13 10
11 284 337 13 9
12 287 341 12 7
13 293 345 12 5
14 304 350 11 4
15 330 355 11 2
16 22 360 11 2
17 55 5 11 4
18 69 10 11 5
19 75 16 11 7
20 79 21 11 9
21 270 333 11 9
22 270 338 10 7
23 268 342 10 5
24 265 348 10 3
25 254 354 9 1
26 116 0 9 1
27 100 6 9 3
28 97 13 9 5
29 95 20 9 7
30 95 26 9 9
31 257 326 8 9
32 254 334 9 7
33 248 339 8 5
34 236 345 8 4
35 206 352 7 2
36 155 0 7 2
37 125 8 7 4
38 113 17 7 5
39 107 25 7 7
40 103 33 7 9
41 245 320 7 10
42 239 325 7 8
43 231 332 6 6
44 216 339 6 5
45 194 350 5 4
46 166 0 5 4
47 144 12 5 5
48 130 23 5 6
49 121 34 5 8
50 115 43 5 10
CD-2073
129 The Variable guard zone can be positioned to any
range from 1.25nm out to 40nm.
NOTE:
130 To change the Variable guard zone range, move the
If the cursor is outside the radar area, the left pushbutton
gives direct access to vector mode without moving the trackerball to anywhere on the zone (not at the ends)
cursor into the vector box. and press the [Select] pushbutton. Movement of the
trackerball then changes the range. Pressing [Select] again
fixes the new range.
Vector Time
120 The vector time can be changed between 1 and 30 Bearing Limits
minutes, in increments of 1 minute, by pressing and
operating the trackerball in the vertical axis to increase or 131 The port and starboard bearing limits of both the Fixed
decrease the time shown next to VECTORS in the and Variable guard zones default to 45 relative to
OWNSHIP DATA field. Ownships.
121 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The 132 To change the bearing limits select the [PLOT] menu
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the and [GUARD] function. Move the trackerball to the
plot (e.g. target speed 12 knots (KT) then vector length is either end of the guard ring that is to be adjusted (i.e. port or
3nm, which is the distance the target travels in 15 minutes). starboard) and press the [Select] pushbutton. Move the
trackerball to increase or decrease the angle, Minimum port
limit 15 Maximum starboard limit 180 from ships head.
Plot Data Press [Select] pushbutton to enter the new value. To
122 To display plot data, position the cursor on or near the de-activate a guard ring press [Select], position the
required activated target/vector and press the [Select] trackerball anywhere on the ring and then press the
pushbutton. The target plot symbols and vector flash; data right-hand pushbutton.
on the selected target is displayed/ updated in the TARGET NOTE:
DATA field every scan. The quantity of data available is
dependent on the data being sent by the vessel and how The fixed ring can only be selected at its ends.
often (e.g. Class B AIS vessels will not send ETA at all.
Check Previous or Next Page buttons on the PAGE box of AIS ALARMS
the target data to select other data.
133 AIS Alarms, listed below, are displayed in a RED
123 To vary either the [CPA LIMIT] or the [TCPA LIMIT]
highlighted box on the right-hand side of the screen.
select the function and press and hold down the left
pushbutton, operate the trackerball in the vertical plane to 134 Warnings produce an audible alarm and the following
increase or decrease the limit value. Press the centre alarm messages may be displayed in the highlighted
pushbutton to enter the minimum (MINIM) value and the box:
right pushbutton to enter the maximum (MAX) value.
(1) Collision Warning
124 The default values are 15min (TCPA) and 1nm (CPA). When a tar get is
within both CPA and TCPA, the dangerous plot
GUARD ZONES flashes in red.
(2) Lost Target
125 Two Guard Zones are available, one Fixed and the If a dangerous plot is
other Variable, each zone is preset to 0.5nm wide. not seen for the stipulated time (see table) the Lost
Plot symbol appears in the last vector position and
Fixed Zone an Acknowledge box appears above the warning
box.
126 The Fixed guard zone is preset at 5.5nm to 6.0nm.
(3) New Target
127 To activate the Fixed and Variable guard zones, Targets automatically
select [GUARD] in the [PLOT] menu and press any activated by the guard rings are shown as
pushbutton, the Fixed guard zone appears on the screen at activated, and if dangerous (as red dangerous
5.5nm to 6.0nm. The Variable guard zone appears on the plots).
screen at 7 nm to 7.5 nm and can be adjusted from 1.25nm
to 40nm. The pop-down box allows selection of the zones
Active or Switched Off.
The following Table provides a list of ATA, ARPA and AIS features and a description of each.
CHAPTER 3
INTERPRETING THE PPI DISPLAY & SART OPERATION
CD-2528
Radar Bandwidth
39 This is matched to the radar pulse length and is
switched with the range scale and the associated pulse
length. Narrow bandwidths of 3 - 5 MHz are used with long
pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10 - 25 MHz
with short pulses on short ranges.
40 Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz attenuates the
SART signal slightly, so a medium bandwidth is
normally selected to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
Operating Instructions are to be consulted about the
particular radar parameters and bandwidth selections.
SART OPERATION USING NUCLEUS 3 48 To select the SART code only on the radar screen,
DISPLAY refer to Chapter 1 - To Detune, To Display SART
Responses Only. This off-centred tuning erases all normal
47 In operation, the SART responds automatically using a radar images caused by echoes with the same frequency as
9.2GHz to 9.5GHz high-speed frequency sweeping the radar transmission. However, the SART code is not
signal with a pulse emission period of 100ms which is erased because the SART response signal scans all
synchronous with any received scanning pulse. The SART frequencies in the 9GHz band.
response signal scans all frequencies in the 9GHz radar
band (refer to Figure 1).
350 000
010
340 020
330 Radar Antenna
030
Beam
320 040
310 050
300 060
SART
290 Location 070
280 080
260 100
250 110
240 120
Range
9.2GHz Sweep Time
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160 9.5GHz
190 180 170
Operating Information
Index
A B
acquire a target 2-2 Bandwidth 3-4
Acquire Target 2-7, 2-18 Baud Rates Setup Screen 1-7
Acquire Target 2-2 BCR/BCT 2-1, 2-6
ACQUISITION OPTIONS 2-21 Beacons 3-3
ACQUISITION RANGE 2-22 Bearing 2-2
ACQUISITION SPEED 2-22 Bearing discrimination 3-1
Activating Waypoints 1-17 Bearing Limits 2-4, 2-8, 2-19
Activating waypoints 1-17 Blind Arcs 3-1
acute atmospheric conditions 3-2 Bow Crossing Range 2-4, 2-16
adverse weather conditions 3-3 Bow Crossing Range (BCR) 2-2
Alarm De-selection /Operator Action 2-3, 2-9, 2-20 Bow Crossing Range (BCR) 2-11
Anchor Alarm 2-11 Bow Crossing Time 2-4, 2-16
Anchor Target 2-11 Bow Crossing Time (BCT) 2-2
Anchor Watch 2-11 brilliance and contrast 1-2
Anchor Watch 2-9 Buttons & Trackerball Information 1-24
anomalous propagation 3-2
Antenna Height, Range and Bearing C
Discrimination 3-1
CANCEL ENTRY 2-1
Anti-clutter Rain Control 3-4
Clearing the Current Map 1-20
Anti-clutter Sea Control 3-4
Clearing Waypoints 1-17
ARPA 2-6, 2-11
Clock Setup 1-6
ARPA - A comprehensive Automatic Radar
Plotting Aid 2-1 CLOCK SETUP 1-6
ARPA ALARMS 2-8, 2-19 CLOCK TYPE box 1-6
ARPA fault 2-9 Closest Point of Approach 1-28, 2-4, 2-16
ARPA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-7, 2-18 Closest Point of Approach (CPA) 2-2
ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid 2-1 Closest Point of Approach (CPA) 2-11
ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid 2-1 Closest Point Of Approach Limit 1-15
ATA ALARMS 2-2 Collision 2-3, 2-9, 2-20
ATA Fault 2-3 Collision targets 2-14
ATA PARAMETERS 2-3 Collision Warning 2-3, 2-9, 2-20
ATA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-2 COLOURS 1-3
ATA/ARPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2-21 Comms Setup Menu Screen 1-7
Audible (AUD) alarm 1-2 Contrast & Brilliance Adjustment 1-23
Audible Alarms 1-23 CORRELATOR 3-3
AUTO SEA 1-29 Correlator box 1-11
AUTO TARGET ACQUISITION 2-12 Course & Speed 2-2
Autodrift 2-6 Course over ground (COG) 1-27
Automatic acquisition options 2-6, 2-18 CPA 2-1
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid 2-6, 2-18 CPA Limit 1-28
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) 2-1 CPA limit box 1-15
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) 2-1 CPA LIMIT Box 1-15
Creating a New Map 1-20
Amdt. 5 i July 03
KH 2020
Index (Chap 1-3)
C (Cont.) E
Creating Polyzones 2-12 EBL Box Electronic Bearing Line 1-16
Cross pulse blanking 3-2 Echoes 3-1
Ghost 3-2
Crt Test 1-6
Spurious 3-2
Cursor 1-1 Editing Polyzones 2-13
Cursor box 1-24 Editing the Current Map 1-21
Cursor Control and Mode 1-9, 1-31 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) 1-28
Cursor Positioning 1-4 ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID 2-1
CURSOR POSITIONING 1-25 Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) 2-1
Cursor Positioning and Initial Pushbutton Facilities 1-4 ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID CONTROLS 2-1
Curved EBL 1-30 Electronic Tape Measure 1-24
Curved EBL Box 1-18 END Box 1-19
EPA - A Manual Electronic Plotting Aid 2-1
D
EPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2-5
Data and Menus 1-9, 1-17, 1-31
ERBL Activation 1-16
Day/Night Operation 1-3
ERGOPOD ICON 1-24
Day/Night Selection 1-23
error sources 2-6
de-activate a guard zone 2-4
Exit The NAV Menu 1-19
Default Settings 1-7
Exiting the Maps Menu 1-22
Degauss 1-2
Exiting the VDU Menu 1-23
Delay 2-14
external stabilisation 1-14
delete all plots 2-3
DELETE PLOT 2-1 F
Deleting a Map 1-21 False Echoes 3-1
Deleting Plots 2-2 FAZ 2-6, 2-18
Deleting Polyzones 2-13 Fixed Guard Zone 2-3, 2-8, 2-19
DEPTH Box 1-15 Fixed Zone 2-8, 2-19
Detuning The Radar 3-4 Fog 3-3
Display Zones 1-9 Footprint Acquisition Zone (FAZ) 2-12
Displaying SART Responses 1-11 Footprint Acquisition Zones 2-6, 2-18
Doppler (W or G SPD) 1-14 Footprint Acquisition Zones 2-11
Doppler log speed input 1-14 Footprint Acquisition Zones (FAZ) 2-6, 2-18
Drawing Circles 1-22 Four Target Simulation Mode 2-5
Drawing Lines 1-21
Drawing Polyzones 2-12
DRIFT Box 1-14
Drift Input 2-1, 2-7
ducting 3-2
July 03 ii Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Index (Chap 1-3)
G L
Gain 3-4 L SPD Box Speed 1-14
GAIN 1-29 L spd box speed 1-14
GAIN, Sea & rain 1-29 Labels 2-4, 2-13
GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1-12 Land Echoes 3-3
GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1-16 Land Mode 1-4
Ghost Echoes 3-2 Land Mode 1-25
Ghost target 3-2 LAT/LON Box 1-15
ghosting 3-2 Latitude/longitude 1-28
Glossary 1-25 Loading a Map 1-20
GO TO INSTALL 1-8 Loading Polyzones 2-13
GO TO MENUS 1-5, 1-6 Local Time 1-6
GO TO MENUS 1-6 LOG speed (L SPD). 1-14
Go To Test 1-6 Lost Target 2-3, 2-6, 2-9, 2-20
Great Circle 1-30 Lost Target 2-1
GROUND REFERENCE 2-5, 2-21 Lost Target alarm 2-21
Ground Stabilisation 1-27 LOST TARGETS 2-5, 2-21
Growlers 3-3 Low signal - to - clutter 2-6
Guard zone activities 2-11 Low signal - to - noise 2-6
Guard Zones 2-3, 2-1, 2-6, 2-13, 2-18
GUARD ZONES 2-8, 2-19 M
Gyro WARNINGS 1-25 manual speed (M SPD) 1-14
manual speed input 2-16
H manual stabilisation 1-14
Hail 3-3 Manual Stabilisation 1-28
Hail, Snow and Ice 3-3 manual tuning 1-11
HDG Box Master Gyro Heading 1-14 Map Directory box 1-20
HL Off Box 1-13 Maps
Symbol Placement 1-21
I Maps Menu 1-20
Maps, Routes & waypoint Positioning 1-30
Ice 3-3
Master GYRO heading 1-25
Ice Walls 3-3
modes of time-keeping 1-6
Icebergs 3-3
Moving the Current Map 1-21
IMO resolutions 2-6, 2-18
MP Box Pulse Length Selection 1-10
Interference Rejection (IR) 1-26
MP Box Pulse Length Selection 1-10
interference rejector circuits 3-2
Multiple Echoes 3-1
intermittent echoes 3-3
Mute box 1-11
Interpreting PPI Presentation 3-1
Mute Box 1-11
INTERPRETING THE PPI DISPLAY 3-1
mute sector 1-11
INTRODUCTION 1-1
Mute Sector 1-27
Mute Sector Skew 1-27
N P (Cont.)
Nav menu 1-18 PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-2
Navigation & Clutter Information 1-16 PLOTTING LIMITATIONS 2-4, 2-16, 2-20
New Target 2-9, 2-20 PLOTTING MODE 2-5
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports 1-7 PM box Performance monitor 1-10
North Up (Azimuth Mode) Box 1-12 Polyzones 2-12
port and starboard bearing limits 2-4
O Power ON/OFF 1-2
On/Off Sounder unit 1-2 PPI display 3-1
Open Sea 3-3 PPI Display
optional watch alarm 1-8 Open Sea 3-3
PPI DISPLAY 3-1
Options 2-1, 2-7
PPI Modes and Presentation 1-27
Ownship and Plotting Parameters 1-9, 1-31
PPI presentation. 3-2
OWNSHIP DATA 2-7, 2-19
Pulse Selection 1-9
Ownship Graphics 1-8
Pushbutton Menu 1-24
Ownship Information 1-14
Pushbuttons 1-2
OWNSHIP RATE OF TURN 2-5, 2-22
Ownship Setup 1-8 R
OWNSHIP SETUP 1-8
RADAR AERIAL RATE 2-22
Ownship speed 1-14
RADAR ANTENNA RATE 2-5
OWNSHIP SPEED 2-5, 2-22
Radar Bandwidth 3-4
July 03 iv Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Index (Chap 1-3)
R (Cont.) S (Cont.)
Receiver Performance 1-10 Sector Selection 2-11
Ref. Target 2-11 Sector Storage Level indication 2-11
Reference Target 2-11 Sectors 2-6, 2-18
Reference Targets 2-6, 2-11 select a target 2-2
reflected echo 3-3 SET Box 1-14
Relative Motion with Relative Trail (RM(R)) 1-12 SET VIDEO LEVELS box 1-23
Relative Motion with True Trails (RM(T)) 1-12 Settings for Gain, Sea and Rain 1-16
Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R) 1-27 setup menus 1-5
Rhumb Line 1-30 Short/Medium/Long Pulse 1-25
Rm (R) (Motion Mode) Box 1-12 Shortcut to PLOT Menu 1-19
RM (R) (Motion mode) box 1-12 Shortcut to VDU Menu 1-19
Run 1-4 Side lobes/reflections 2-6
RUN 1-25 Simulation 2-1, 2-6
SIMULATION 2-5, 2-22
S Simulation Mode 2-5
SART 1-25, 3-4 SIMULATION MODE 2-3, 2-9
Radar Side Lobes 3-4
Smooth Flat Ice 3-3
Range Errors 3-4
SART Operation Using Nucleus 3 Display 3-5 Snow 3-3
SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) 3-1 Speed Over Ground (SOG) 1-27
SART DETECTION 3-4 Spurious Echoes 3-2
SART OPERATION 3-1 stab box stabilisation 1-14
SART Range Errors 3-4 STAB Box Stabilisation 1-14
SART Signal on Display 3-5 Stabilisation Mode 1-27
Saving a Map 1-20 Stabilisation Sources 1-28
Saving Polyzones 2-13 Stabilised headings 2-12
Scan to Scan Correlation (SC/SC) 1-26 Standard Simulation Mode 2-3, 2-9
Screen Control Unit (SCU) 1-2 Standby 1-4
Screen Illumination 1-2 STANDBY 1-25
Screen Mode of Operation 1-9, 1-31 Standby Menus 1-5
Sea 3-3 Standby Mode 1-8
SEA (STC) 1-29 Standby Screen 1-4
Sea and Swell 3-3 Standby/Run 1-4
SEA Anti-clutter 3-3 Stern Marker 1-8
Sea Mode 1-4 System Warning Alarm 1-5
Sea Mode 1-25
sea stabilisation 1-14
Sea Stabilisation 1-27
Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) 3-4
Amdt. 5 v July 03
KH 2020
Index (Chap 1-3)
T T (Cont.)
Target Acquisition 2-1, 2-6, 2-18 Trackerball 1-1
TARGET CORRELATION 2-5, 2-22 Tracking 2-1, 2-6
Target data 2-1 TRACKING 2-5
Target Data 2-2, 2-3, 2-7, 2-13, 2-19 tracking accuracy 2-4, 2-6
TARGET DATA 2-2, 2-5, 2-21 TRACKING ACCURACY 2-21
Target Data box 2-2 tracking accuracy 2-16
Target Data box 2-1 TRACKING CAPACITY 2-22
TARGET FADING 2-22 TRACKING MODE 2-21
TARGET FADING/ PLOT LIMIT 2-5 Tracking Overload 2-1, 2-3, 2-7, 2-9
Target History 2-6 TRACKING OVERLOAD 2-16
TARGET HISTORY (ATA) 2-22 TRACKING RESOLUTION 2-22
Target information 2-2 TRACKING WINDOWS 2-21
Target labels 2-4, 2-13 TRAILS Box 1-15
Target Number 2-2 TRAILS Box 1-15
Target Past History 2-8 Transmitter Information 1-10
Target Plots 2-2 Transmitter performance 1-10
Target plotting limitations 2-4, 2-16, 2-20 Transmitter Performance 1-10
Target plotting using the EPA 2-4 TRIAL COURSE 2-14
Target Simulation 2-9 TRIAL COURSE LINE 2-14
target smearing 3-2 Trial Course/Speed/Time 2-14
TARGET SPEED 2-5, 2-22 trial manoeuvre 1-23
TARGET SWAP 2-22 Trial Manoeuvre 2-4, 2-6, 2-14, 2-18
ARPA 2-6, 2-18
TARGET TOTE 2-4, 2-16, 2-20
TRIAL MANOEUVRE 2-5, 2-22
Targets Entering Mute Sector 1-27
Trial Manoeuvre Screen 2-15
TARGETS ON A BEARING 2-5, 2-22
TRIAL MENU 2-4, 2-14
TCPA 2-1
TRIAL MENU 1-23
TCPA Limit 1-28
TRIAL SPEED 2-14
TCPA LIMIT Box 1-15
True Motion with True Trails (TM(T)) 1-12
TCPA/CPA Limit 2-1
Tune Box bargraph Control 1-11
TCPA/CPA LIMIT 2-6, 2-18
Tuning & Responses 1-25
Terminating the Simulation 2-9
Tx box - Transmitter Selection 1-10
Test Card 1 1-6
Type Checking 1-7
TEST DIAGNOSTICS 2-22
Typical sun and plume responses 1-10
Tide Direction 1-14
Tide Rate 1-14 U
Time to Closest Point of Approach 2-4, 2-16
Unacknowledged alarms 2-3
Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) 2-2
Using The Performance Monitor 1-10
Time To Closest Point Of Approach Limit 1-15
UTC (Universal Time Constant) 1-6
time-keeping 1-6
UTC Adjusted 1-6
Toggling the Route 1-17
Toggling Waypoint Labels 1-17
TOTE box 2-4, 2-16
July 03 vi Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Index (Chap 1-3)
V W
Variable Guard Zone 2-3, 2-8, 2-19 Warning Set Up Screen 1-5
Variable Range Marker 1-16 Watch Monitor 1-8
Variable Range Marker (VRM) 1-28 WEAK ECHO SEARCH 2-1, 2-6
Variable Zone 2-8, 2-19 Wheel over point 1-30
VDU Box 1-19 WOP Box - Wheel Over Point 1-18
VDU menu 1-23 WPt Box 1-17
VECTOR Box 1-15
VECTOR FACILITIES 2-5, 2-21 Z
Vector Mode 2-2, 2-6, 2-7, 2-18, 2-19 Zone 1 - Radar System 1-9
Vector Mode 2-1 Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation 1-9
vector origin 2-1 Zone 3 - Ownship and Plotting Parameters 1-9
Vector Time 2-2, 2-7, 2-19 Zone 4 - VRM, EBL and Signal Controls 1-9
Vector Time (Vector Length) 2-2 Zone 5 - Data and Menus 1-9
Vectors Zone 6 -Cursor Control and Mode 1-9
ARPA 2-6, 2-18 Zone Acquisition 2-6, 2-18
Vectors 1-28
Video Box 1-11
video correlation and interference rejection 1-26
video correlator 1-11
Video Enhance 1-26
Video Levels Adjustment 1-23
Video Normal 1-26
VRM Box - Variable Range Marker 1-16
VRM, EBL and Signal Controls 1-9, 1-31
CHAPTER 4a
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS DISPLAYS
Page
INTRODUCTION 4a.1
CHAPTER 4b
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkIV
Page
INTRODUCTION 4b.1
General 4b.2
Fitting 4b.2
MONITOR ARM 4b.5
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 4b.5
CHECKS AFTER FITTING 4b.5
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 4b.8
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
CHAPTER 4c
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkV
Page
INTRODUCTION 4c.1
CHAPTER 4d
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVI
Page
INTRODUCTION 4d.1
INSTALLATION 4d.2
General 4d.13
Cover Removal 4d.13
PCB Locations And Cableform Routing 4d.13
Wiring Diagrams 4d.16
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
CHAPTER 4e
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (S-BAND)
Page
GENERAL 4e.1
INSTALLATION 4e.2
INTRODUCTION 4e.32
Cable Specifications 4e.32
CHAPTER 4f
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (X-BAND)
Page
GENERAL 4f.1
Installation 4f.3
Introduction 4f.29
Cable Specifications 4f.29
Sep 01 iv Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
CHAPTER 5
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING
Page
INTRODUCTION 5.1
ILLUSTRATIONS
CHAPTER 4a
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS DISPLAYS
Page
Figure 6a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkIV - Upmast) via RIU: Interconnections 4a.13
Figure 8a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII -S-Band) via RIU: Interconnections 4a.17
Figure 10a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII, X-Band, High Speed), via
RIU: Interconnections 4a.21
Figure 11a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via RIU and
Soft Start Unit: Interconnections 4a.23
Figure 13a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitters (MkVI & MkIV - Upmast), via
Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections 4a.27
Amdt. 1 v Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4a
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS DISPLAYS
Page
Figure 15a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed), via
Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections 4a.31
Figure 16a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed), via
Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections 4a.33
CHAPTER 4b
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkIV
Page
Figure 3b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver Transmitter Monitor Arm: Connection Diagram 4b.5
CHAPTER 4c
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkV
Page
Sep 01 vi Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4c
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkV
Page
Figure 11c - Typical High Speed Antenna System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8) 4c.22
Figure 12c - High Speed Antenna Interswitched System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8) 4c.23
Figure 14c - Nucleus 3 Display - Radar Interswitch Unit - Transceiver Interconnections 4c.25
CHAPTER 4d
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVI
Page
Figure 10d - Soft Start Unit with In-line Power Supply 4d.18
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4e
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (S-BAND)
Page
Figure 12e - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4e.21
Figure 13e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4e.22
Figure 18e - Nucleus 3 Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Downmast Transceiver CTX-A9
and MkVI Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit 4e.28
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4f
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (X-BAND)
Page
Figure 10f - Transceiver (CTX-A8) to High Speed Antenna (CAE-A30-5) Connections 4f.24
Figure 14f - Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via RIU) CANbus System Connection 4f.28
CHAPTER 5
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING
Page
Figure 1 - System PCB (NNR-A911) : Links, Switch and Potentiometer Locations 5.13
Amdt. 1 ix Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 4 & 5)
Sep 01 x Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Chap 4a
CHAPTER 4A
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - DISPLAYS
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
12 The diagrams listed in Table 4.1a below, provide installation information for the Nucleus Displays:
Table 4.1a
Figure Description
1a Nucleus 3 5000 Display Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
2a Nucleus 3 5000 Display Internal Connections.
3a Nucleus 3 6000 Display (Pedestal) Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
4a Nucleus 3 6000 Split Display Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
5a Nucleus 3 6000 Display Internal Connections.
6a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkIV - Upmast) Interconnections.
7a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkV ) Interconnections.
8a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - S-Band) Interconnections.
9a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed ) Interconnections.
10a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed ) Interconnections.
11a Nucleus 3 Display To RIU to Soft Start Unit to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast) Interconnections
12a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII -S-Band) Interconnections
13a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitters (MkVI & MkIV - Upmast) Interconnections
14a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast) Interconnections
15a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band , Low Speed) Interconnections.
16a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed) Interconnections.
17a Nucleus 3 Displays: Mains and Power Distribution.
3. Feed the ship's cables (power, signal, compass & log) through the rear of the console.
XXXX-XX
34
DANGER
High
Voltage
4. Locate the console into position and secure with bolts as required.
479
353 KELVIN HUGHES nucleus3 5000 5. Ensure that the console is correctly earthed to the ship's earth.
70
6. Connect the cables as shown on the appropriate Connections diagrams.
ON-OFF DEGAUSS
60 45
M10 THREADED
AV MOUNTS 470
414
53 (4 OFF) 36
490
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
380.00
34
A
133.00
A
446.00
313.00
FAN ASSY (NNR-A376) A
133.00
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (45-677-114)
A
40
SCAN COILS
ANCILLARY CONTROLS
DEGAUSS ON/OFF
FLYING FLYING
LEAD LEAD
2-WAY
IN LINE
CONNECTORS CN10 0V
FAN
CN11 PL3 PL6 SK3
NNR-A376
PL2 SK4
CN9
CN7
FAN POWER SUPPLY ASSY TUBE BASE PCB
NNR-A376 45-677-114 DC SUPPLIES VIDEO/DEFLECTION PCB NNR-A135-2
NNR-A371
CN4 CN5 SK8 SK5
SK6 SK6
CN1 CN6 CN3
SK7 SK7
DEGAUSS COILS
LINE OUTPUT PART OF
22 PL1
TRANSFORMER TUBE BASE PCB
PL4 PL6
INPUT PCB PLA SYSTEMS PCB PL2 ARPA 3 PCB (OPTIONAL)
NNR-A996 NNR-A911 NNR-A128
PL4
PL7
SPEAKER TRACKERBALL
2-WAY
IN LINE
CONNECTOR PUSH
CD-4452 BUTTON PLC
KEYBOARD
56
for the operator, for ventilation, and for cable access.
3. Feed the ship's cables (power, signal, compass and log etc) through
the rear or base of the pedestal.
56
94
4. Locate the pedestal into its designated position and secure the
Anti-vibration mounts in position.
1195
HANDLES
5. Fit the skirts to the base of the pedestal, by fastening the snap in plastic
rivets, through the holes in the skirt bracket, to underside of the pedestal base.
DANGER
High
Voltage
REAR ACCESS
CABLE CLAMP
(included in fitting kit) ACCESS DOOR 6. Ensure that the pedestal is correctly earthed to the ship's earth.
702 SECURING CATCHES
140
7. Connect the cables as shown on the appropriate Connections diagrams.
53 VENTILATION HOLES
83
EARTH STUD
53
Display Weight: 100kg
60
300
475 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
80 820 MAX
51 580 GRADE 1 GRADE 2
98
682 (OVERALL CASEWORK) 1/4 1
2.0m 0.8m
475
70 300 105
ACCESS TO PCBs
& CONNECTIONS
in baseplate
FIX SKIRT TO PEDESTAL BASE USING
Pedestal SNAP-IN PLASTIC RIVETS SUPPLIED
ARPA SYSTEM POWER CABLEFORM 113 base
NNR-A5015
INPUT PCB
NNR-A910
SYSTEM MOUNTING HOLES
ARPA
FLEXIBLE RUBBER
A: 4 x Holes internal fixings
INPUT 14mm dia.
SKIRT (NNR-A5076) DETAIL
A A
51
L L
3 3
FS2
110/220v
0UTPUT
L N E
X1
INPUT
FS1
1 1
N N
60
SERIAL No
FAN 55
HRC-A185
LABEL 110
HRC-1121
PSU
LABEL LABEL (SERIAL No.) 45-677-110
FILTER ASSY RM-7710 RTX-1173
HRC-A202 NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
VIEW WITH OUTER DOOR REMOVED
(PCB & CONNECTOR LOCATIONS) CD-4464
455.5
608
(if underneath, cut out the hole as shown, swap the
56O 163 Connecting Plate and Blanking Plate over).
AIR VENT 204.5
BOTH SIDES 112.5 2. Fasten the Display Unit to the required location,
475 using the fixings and anti-vibration mounts supplied.
LOWER SIDE PANELS CAN BE
64 REMOVED TO ALLOW ACCESS
390
TO FIXING HOLES 682
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
820 MAX.
REF 475
380 NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional
12mm DIA (IN 6 POSITIONS)
53
285
5, 10, 15 & 20m kits also available.
SHOWN THUS
FRONT PANEL
OVERHANG 1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving
sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable access and
servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the
REAR VIEW
diagram.
682 REF
626
400
612
2. Secure the Processor Unit in position.
FOR UNDERSIDE CABLE 3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and
M10 THREADED AV MOUNT
ENTRY SWAP POSITION
OF UNDERSIDE BLANKING
612 (IN 4 POSITIONS) make the connections as detailed on the appropriate
PLATE AND REAR Connections Diagram(s).
113
CONNECTOR PLATE
28
115 150
300 M10 THREADED BUSHES (IN 6 POSITIONS)
the ship's earth, using the bolt provided.
SHOWN THUS Display Weight : 65kg
SUPPLY IN/OUT
POWER CONSUMPTION: 380VA
L L
OUTPUT N
3 CORE (CABLE L) * N POWER
SOCKET
TERMINALS E E
WEIGHTS
PROCESSOR UNIT: 13kg
PROCESSOR CASE DESK CONSOLE: 65kg
AUDIO
# AUDIO LINE 2 CORE (CABLE A) AUDIO
CABLE ACCESS SOCKET SOCKET
280 62.5
230 418
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
CD-4556
MONITOR
MAGNETIC
AMPLIFIER PCB
NNR-A536
COMPENSATION
DEGAUSS COIL COIL
DC SUPPLIES
85-290-0027-001 PL1 PL2
3-PHASE PL9
SWITCHED PL3
TRANSFORMER
MAINS OUTPUT
(OPTIONAL)
POWER UNIT Tx-SK PL5 PL1 PL3 PL2 PL2
NNR-A322
45-677-110 FAN DC SUPPLIES
55-100-0087-001 MONITOR PSU DEFLECTION PCB VIDEO/TUBE
45-980-0009-001 45-980-0008-001 GRID/HTR BASE PCB
CON 1 PL7 PL3 45-980-0010-001
FUSES
MAINS INPUT FILTER
FS1 & FS2
CON 2 PL4 PL11 PL5 PL1
SWITCHED MAINS FAN VIDEO/SYNC
55-100-0088-001
CON 3
ON/OFF & DC SUPPLIES
IN LINE
PL7 4 WAY
PLB PLH
CLK/DIR TBALL 1
ERGOPOD
PLC PLT
Tx CAN DIU
SK15 PL5
25-WAY D TYPE
PLU PUSHBUTTON KEYS
PLE COMPASS 1 VIDEO/SYNC
ALARMS 45-910-516
LOG CONTROL
TRACKERBALL
PLF PLV SPARE MONITOR CODE
SER 1 & 2 Tx CONTROL 45-881-1/2
OUTPUT DOWNLOAD
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk IV UPMAST TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CAE-A12-20
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6 WHITE COAX
VIDEO
OUT IN
VIDEO
SKO
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SK13 - 18 GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC SYNC
OUT IN
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F
BLACK
CAN HI 1 1
WHITE
CAN LO 2 2
BLUE
GND 3 3
4 ORANGE 4
HEADING LINE
5 RED 5
AZIMUTH
6 6
YELLOW
PLL-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7 7
8 GREEN 8
GND
PLW
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2
PLA
1
2
8
3
6
4
7
12
PLC 2PLB
B/O
1 1
G/Y
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 2
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY
NNR-A981
PLB TB1-B TB1-C
S 2
RUN 1
R/G 3
MUTE 2
B/Y
MP 3 7
B/W
LP 4 6
R/Y IN LINE
TUNE CONTROLS 5 4
R/W TERMINAL
TUNE INDICATORS 6
Tx READY T BLOCK
7 1
AZIMUTH G/O 4
8
N/C 9
Rx MON B/Bk
10 6
HEADING LINE G/W 3
11
N/C 12
N/C 13
GROUND R/B 5
14
FILTER
L N E
2-CORE
CD-4517 MAINS POWER
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 CABLE TIU Mk V
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB RIU
NNR-A55 CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6 WHITE COAX VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO 3
OUT IN
SKO SKG SKH
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 2
OUT IN 1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S PLA PLB PLG
BLACK 1 S
CAN HI 1 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE 2 R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE 3 B/Y
GND 3 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4 4
5 RED 5 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5 5
6 6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6 6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
7 7 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 8 G/O
GND 8 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
PLW 10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2 12
13
14 R/B
12 5 0V
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4516
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER SOFT START UNIT
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A9
INPUT PCB CZZ-A14
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1 TB1
OUT IN
SKO 1
SK19 - 24 SK13 - 18 3 PHASE 2
GREY COAX SYNC SYNC MAINS
SYNC SYNC 1 3
OUT IN
SW1 (+27V) 1 Bn 1
PLW 1
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 V 2
2
+24V 1 3
(MOTOR) 2 3 3 PHASE
2PLB MAINS
3SKM
Bk
12 1 9SKA
ON/OFF +27V 6
2 R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
Y 7
FILTER HEADING LINE 4
W 8
0V 5
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE L R 1 Tx MON 0V
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY 2 CORE Tx MONITOR
N B 2 Tx MON SIG
MAINS INPUT ARM
E
12 CORE
CABLE
CD-4515
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A8
INPUT PCB
SKP TURNING MECHANISM
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1 CAE-A30-6
OUT IN
SKO 1TB1 1TB1
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 T OR Lt/G
SYNC SYNC 1 5 2
OUT IN S
6
MOTOR 0V
7
8
NOTE 1 O 1
NOTE 1 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S 3PLX P
2
MOTOR +ve 26V
BLACK 1 1 3
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2 4
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4 3SKK
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 Bn
6 6 MOTOR START (+27V) 1 3
6 V
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB MOTOR START RTN 2 4
7
GREEN 8 8 5
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH 3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
PLW R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
+24V 1 NEON RETURN 2 6
(MOTOR) 2 G
AZIMUTH 3 2
2PLB Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
12 1 0V 5 4
ON/OFF R
2 Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
B
ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
FILTER 12 CORE
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE SMALL
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY 2 CORE L CABLE
MAINS INPUT N
E
CD-4521
Figure 9a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed) via RIU: Interconnections
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER TURNING MECHANISM
NNR-A55 CTX-A8 CAE-A30-5
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1
OUT IN
SKO 1TB1 1TB2
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 T OR Lt/G
SYNC SYNC 1 5 5
OUT IN B/Bk
S
6 6
B/O
MOTOR 0V
B/Y
NOTE 1 NOTE 1 7 7
G/Y
PLC PLA-F PLL-S 3PLX B/W
BLACK 1 1 8 8
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI G/W
WHITE 2 2 O
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO 1 1
BLUE 3 3 R/W
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4 P
HEADING LINE 4 2 2
RED 5 5 R/Bk
AZIMUTH 5
6 6 MOTOR +ve 36V R/B
6 3 3
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB R/Bn
7
GREEN 8 8 R/Y
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE 4 4
8 AZIMUTH R/G
PLW
3SKK 1TB1
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2 MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn
2PLB 5
MOTOR START RTN 2 V
6
12 1 3
ON/OFF
2
3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
R
FILTER NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
L G
2 CORE AZIMUTH 3 2
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE N Y
MAINS INPUT HEADING LINE 4 3
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY E W
0V 5 4
R
25 CORE Tx MONITOR B 7 Tx MON 0V
CABLE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
CD-4522
Figure 10a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII, X-Band, High Speed), via RIU: Interconnections
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45) LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
V2
2
5
3
8
4
+27V 12 R W 12 +27V
12 TB5 13 +27V
PLC G
R/B 1 0V R/B +27V
B/O R 14
1 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
G/Y
CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
NNR-A981 B/Y 4 MP B/Y
B/W 5 LP B/W
PLB
S 6 RUN S CONTROL BOARD SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION
BOX.
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE S U1
RUN 1 R/G 7 MUTE R/G W2
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY R/G LOCATION PLM
MUTE 2 G/O 8 AZ G/O
B/Y 3 V1
MP 3 G/W 9 HL G/W 6 U2
B/W PLB
LP 4 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
R/Y W1 V2
TUNE CONTROLS 5 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4
R/W
TUNE INDICATORS 6 12 13 3
T B
Tx READY 7 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
G/O B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
AZIMUTH 8 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
N/C 9 T or Lt/G 10 NEON SIG
TB6 Tx READY
B/Bk G/W
Rx MON 10 B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL
G/W G/O OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD
HEADING LINE 11 TO TB2 G 2 0V B/O 8 AZ OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
N/C 12 R/G 7 WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B MUTE
N/C CABLE N S 6
TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
13 4 RUN
R/B (38-CORE) B/W
GROUND 14 5 5 LP U1 W2
TO B/Y 4
6 MP U5
TRANSCEIVER R/W 3 V1 U2
7 TUNE IND
R/Y 2
8 TUNE V5
R/B 1 W1
9 0V V2
PLK
10 W5
CABLE N 11 5
(38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR 2 OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD
VIDEO CONT +ve 1
OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
COAX (W) COAX (W)
U1 W5
W2
COAX'S V1 U5
SYNC 4 0V
COAX (S) W U2
COAX (S) 3 VIDEO
W1 V5
2 SYNC
S V2
1 0V
CD-4555
Figure 11a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via RIU and Soft Start Unit: Interconnections
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Mk VII TRANSMITTER SOFT START UNIT
(HRC-A9) CTX-A9 CZZ-A14
INPUT PCB
TB1
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
(TB1) FOR A MK4 OR MK6 MAINS INPUT
E
SECOND TRANSCEIVER ONLY
CD-4554
Figure 12a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - S-Band) via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections
PLT PLDA-3/PLDB-3 LN
G/Bk 6
SELECT DATA 1 MAINS
W/Bn 4 NOTES:
RADAR SOURCE 2 INPUT FILTER
Y/Bn 5 1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS
Tx CONTROL 3
S/B 7 & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
STATUS 1 4
S/G 8
STATUS 2 5
G/B 9
0V 6
INTERSWITCH
TB1 TB2
NL NL
SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V FILTER * 110/220V * 2-CORE POWER CABLE K Tx POWER CABLE K
CABLE K INPUT TB1 OUTPUT TB2
CD-4514
Figure 13a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitters (MkV & MkIV - Upmast), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections
TB2
W1 V2
R
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR
NUCLEUS 3 TO TB6 B
CABLE B 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
DISPLAY G LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL)
POWER UNIT NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
SHIPS MAINS 24V
SINGLE PHASE 230V 2-CORE POWER CABLE K CABLE K BN or 1 L POWER LOCATION 2
FILTER 110/220V 1 PHASE
U1 W2
TO TB2 G/O 8
G 2 0V B/O AZ
R/G 7
U1 W2
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B MUTE
SKP SK8(10) SK7(9) CABLE N S U5
4 6 RUN
VIDEO WHITE COAX (38-CORE) B/W V1
U2
5 5 LP
TO B/Y V5
SK2(5) SK1(4) 6 4 MP W1
SKO TRANSCEIVER R/W
GREY COAX 7 3 TUNE IND W5
V2
SYNC R/Y 2
8 TUNE
R/B 1
9 0V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
PLK
10 OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
INTERSWITCH CABLE N 11 5 FOR 380/440V
38-CORE CABLE
(CABLE M)
NOTES:
1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-3844
Figure 14a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via Dual Interswitch Unit and Soft Start Unit: Interconnections
PLT PLDA/B-3
G/Bk
SELECT DATA 1 6
W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 2 4
Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 3 5 SK7(9)
S/B
STATUS 1 4 7 VIDEO
S/G VIDEO 1
STATUS 2 5 8 IN
G/B
0V 6 9 SK1(4)
SYNC
SKP SYNC 1
SK8(10) IN
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
WHITE COAX
SKO SK2(5)
SYNC
SYNC GREY COAX OUT
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
(TB1) FOR A MK4 OR MK6 MAINS INPUT
E
SECOND TRANSCEIVER ONLY
CD-4553
Figure 15a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
(TB1) FOR A MK4 OR MK6 MAINS INPUT
E
SECOND TRANSCEIVER ONLY
CD-4551
Figure 16a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections
L TB1 L
FS1 5A
L
SHIPS MAINS N FILTER
N FS2 5A PSU
230V E E MAINS IN N
L N E
PRE-PRODUCTION ONLY
* L * L
N MON N
110/220 110/220 * * E
MON PSU
E FILTER
*
L N E
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR ASSY
TO Tx
CON 1
L
1
L L L
SHIPS MAINS
L TB1 N N
1
N TB3 N MONITOR
N * E
FILTER** 2 PSU 3
230V E
E
3 * E PSU
E
5
MONITOR ASSY
110/220
PROCESSOR UNIT
*
L N E
TO Tx
CON 2
CHAPTER 4B
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKIV
3 This chapter covers Installation of the Mk IV Upmast 6 Combinations of Antennas and Upmast Transceivers
Transmitter /Receivers. are:
4 The diagrams listed in Table 4.1b, provide installation (1) 1.8m X-band 25kW Antenna (CAE-A13/2)
information for the Transmitter/Receiver Units used in Turning Mechanism/Transceiver (CAE-A12-20)
this system. (2) 2.4m X-band 25kW Antenna (CAE-A25)
Turning Mechanism/Transceiver (CAE-A12-20)
Table 4.1b - Installation Diagrams
SAFETY NOTES
1b Upmast X-Band Transceiver CAE-A12-20 (25kW): 7 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
Installation Dimensions encroach on the area of work.
2b X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Cable Routing 8 Mains supplies in the vicinity of the Upmast
Transceiver are to be isolated when installing the
3b X-Band Upmast Transceiver Transmitter Monitor equipment.
Arm:
Connection Diagram 9 A suitable safety platform or harness should be used
when siting the Upmast Transceiver aloft.
4b Assembly of Cable Gland to Upmast
Transceiver/Turning Mechanism 10 The Upmast Transceiver must be hoisted to the fixing
position using a secured block and tackle or rope
5b X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Electrical Connections straps. The assembly MUST NOT be lifted by the antenna;
6b Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions
the complete unit must be secured and hoisted evenly.
7b Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) to Nucleus 11 The transceiver must be earthed to the ship as shown
(5000) Interconnections Diagram on the appropriate illustration.
8b MkIV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) to Radar 12 The earthing straps must be fitted prior to switching on
Processor via RIU Interconnections Diagram the transceiver.
INSTALLATION OF UPMAST X-BAND 17 The Upmast Transceiver must be mounted more than
914mm above any flat surface, when the flat surface is
TRANSCEIVER CAE-A12-20 (25KW) greater than the diameter swept by the antenna.
18 The Upmast Transceiver must not be positioned in the
GENERAL close proximity of any magnetic compass or D/F
antenna, etc.
13 The Upmast Transceiver comprises a casting with two
cover plates. Both cover plates are secured by four NOTE:
bolts and may be removed to access the motor and A heavy duty earthing strap or cable must be taken from the
transceiver PCBs mounted within. The PCBs are secured to upmast transceiver/turning mechanism to the ships earth.
mounting plates which form a safety cage whilst in the closed
position.
19 Position the Upmast Transceiver at the installation
site, supporting the unit where necessary, and mark
FITTING out the mounting holes for drilling. Refer to Figure 1b for
dimensions.
14 The Upmast Transceiver should be installed in such a
position to avoid any RF interference and where Blind 20 Allow sufficient cable length, (approximately 1m) on all
Arcs, caused by obstructions, e.g. masts, funnels, etc, are cables to enable them to be routed through the
eliminated or minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large Transceiver unit. Refer to Figures 2b and 4b for details.
obstructions can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious Ensure that there is sufficient slack on all cables to allow for
echo returns, especially in close proximity to land. full movement of the equipment on its mounts during any
sudden shock, or extreme movement of the vessel.
15 The Upmast Transceiver must not be mounted where
the temperature exceeds 70oC.
16 The Upmast Transceiver must be kept clear of ships WARNING
flexible communication antennas to avoid damage to
both. THE UNIT MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY MEANS OF THE
ANTENNA OR WING CASTING. THE LIFTING
SUPPORTS MUST GO UNDER THE CASTING.
2262 or 1840
Original
75
KELVIN HUGHES
FWD 645
MONITOR
ARM
406
OFF
ON
SAFETY
SWITCH
140
EARTHING POINT
4b.3
CABLE
GLANDS
250 150
310 270
Installation Dimensions
570
310
14 mm holes (4 0 ff )
CD-4541
May 01
Chap 4b
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4b
FWD
TB1C TB1B TB1A TB2
PLB
POWER
SUPPLY
UNIT
HEADING MODULATOR
LINE PCB CONTROL
VIDEO & SYNC PCB
TERMINAL
PLATE
EARTHING POINT
ON UNDERSIDE
SAFETY SWITCH
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
23 For detailed electrical connection of cables to the
transceiver unit, refer to the installation diagrams in
Figure 5b. Ensure that all cables are secured to their
associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed
to their respective units.
24 Connecting cables between the display and the
transceiver should be limited to a length of 65 metres.
Where the distance between transceiver and display is
between 65-180 metres, special low loss co-axial cable is
required.
25 Cable specifications are detailed in Paragraph 30
onwards.
CAE-A106
PLA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BLUE
TO TX MONITOR ARM
RED
6
CD-1134
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
4b.6
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
THROUGH GLAND
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4b
MK IV X-BAND
UPMAST TRANSCEIVER
(CAE-A12-20)
TB1-B
1 TX MON SIG
2 TX MON 0V
G/W 3 HL
G/O 4 AZ
MODULATOR
R/B 5 0V
B/W 6 LONG ULSE
B/Y 7 MEDIUM PULSE
8
TB1-C
38-CORE T or LtG 1 TX READY
(CABLE CODE M) S 2 TX RUN
FROM DISPLAY R/G 3 MUTE
R/Y 4 TUNE
R/W 5 TUNE IND
B/Bk 6 RX MON
PLB
R 1 START +27V POWER
B 2 START RETN UNIT
SYNC 1
SYNC
0V
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 2
0V
E
SHIP'S MAINS
N - MAINS INPUT FILTER
(CABLE CODE K)
L +
CD-4661
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
CABLE CODES
30 Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a
38-core cable. Table 1 provides detailed specifications for
each cable type. For ease of identification, the cable cores
are colour coded (refer to Table 2).
31 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes Radar
equipment are to be to the following specification. If
the cables are not purchased from Kelvin Hughes, the
contractor must either confirm that the cables are to
specification or submit samples to Kelvin Hughes for
approval.
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY
(NNR) Mk IV TRANSMITTER, X BAND
38-CORE CAE-A12-20
INPUT PCB CABLE
(CABLE N)
PLV TB1-B TB1-C
1 S
Tx RUN 2
2 R/G
Tx MUTE 3
3 B/Y
M PULSE 7
4 B/W
L PULSE 6
5 R/Y
TUNE 4
6 R/W
TUNE IND 5
7 T OR Lt/G
Tx READY 1
8 G/O
90/180 AZIMUTH 4
9
10 B/Bk
Rx MONITOR 6
11 G/W
HEADING LINE 3
12
1
13
2
14 R/B
0V 5
PLF
2 CABLE A or
GPS I/P
INTERFACE 3 250V - DPYCS - 1.25
0V
HL/AZ PCB
PLU
1 PLA
PHASE 1 2 R
GYRO
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
3
4
CABLE D or
250V - MPYC - 5
7
8
B }Tx MONITOR
ARM
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
PULSE 7 CABLE A or
LOG SHORT L N
8 250V - DPYCS - 1.25
0V
MAINS INPUT
FILTER
POWER UNIT
110/220V CABLE K or 250V - DPYC - 3.5
INPUT FILTER
OUTPUT (TB2)
CHAPTER 4C
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKV
(3) The plate has to be sited in a clear area where the 14 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be
turning Antenna cannot be obstructed by any mounted more than 914mm above any flat surface,
cables, mast halyards etc. when the flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by
the antenna.
(4) The Antenna and Transceiver Unit must be
hoisted to the fixing position using a secured block 15 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be
and tackle or rope straps. positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic
compass or D/F aerial, etc.
(5) Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
encroach on the area of work. 40V Power Supply (CZZ-A22)
(6) The Antenna and Transceiver Unit must NOT be
lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and 16 The following points must be considered when
hoisted evenly. selecting a suitable site for the Power Supply:
(1) The Power Supply is designed for bulkhead
mounting, away from the turning mechanism.
(2) Consideration must be given to accessibility for
servicing and protection from adverse conditions.
For ease of maintenance, the top of the power
supply should not be mounted more than 1.6m
above the deck.
(3) Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit
for cable entries.
(4) The power supply should be mounted in a position
which allows for ventilation and cooling.
NOTE:
The power supply air circulation MUST NOT be
obstructed.
FITTING NOTE:
The outer casing of the Transceiver must be bonded to the
Transceiver and Turning Mechanism ships superstructure using a copper earthing strap
connected to the earthing point shown in Figure 1.
17 The Antenna and Transceiver are specified and
supplied separately. Refer to Figure 1c for outline (5) The connecting cable from the Transceiver to the
dimensions and fixing centres. The following criteria are to Display should be kept to a maximum of 60
be observed when installing: metres. Do not exceed 60m without consulting the
Kelvin Hughes Technical Department.
NOTE:
(6) Fit the Monitor Arm (if supplied) onto the side of
Assemble the two units together prior to hoisting into the
installation position. the casing and secure the clamp with the four
retaining screws. The monitor arm cable is passed
through the smaller cable gland and clamped. The
cable screen is to be earthed by the ferrules in the
cable gland assembly.
CAUTION
40V Power Supply CZZ-A22
Do not remove the transparent film covering the
waveguide outlet as this prevents the ingress of 18 The +40V Power Supply is fitted to the bulkhead using
water or moisture. the four installation bolts provided.
MONITOR ARM
155
SEE INSTRUCTION 1
562
FWD
FIXING BOLTS
3 x M12
EARTHING
STRAP CABLE ENTRY
CABLE ENTRY 145
( DIAMETER OF CABLE GLAND - 22mm ) (at rear)
380 18mm off centre
290 34mm from base
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES 290 325
Transceiver Weight : 22kg
Antenna (1.3m) Weight: 10kg
Antenna (1.8m) Weight: 14kg DANGER
4c.4
Antenna (2.4m) Weight : 21kg
MOUNTING BOLT HIGH VOLTAGE
Power Consumption : 170W (10kW) 'FOOTPRINT'
160W (5kW)
290
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE 14 mm
o o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 oC
OFF
ON
POSITION OF
ANTENNA ARRAY SAFETY SWITCH
1 Assemble Antenna Array to Transceiver using 6 x M6 bolts, nuts and washers provided.
CABLE ENTRY
5 Pass the cable through the rear of the cable glands, use spanner provided to tighten gland nut
Do not overtighten.
CD-3730
Amdt 6
KH 2020
Chap 4c
RIDGID OR FLEXABLE
WAVEGUIDE
450
290
450
290
12 MM MINIMUM
290 14 mm
300
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
160 70.5
KEYSWITCH
45-613-4205
22
KS2 KS2
KS1 KS1
FAN
45-063-158
CN1
PLB
PLA
8 TB2 1
TB1
R1
HEATSINK
L N
476
401
LOAD DANGER
MAINS FILTER High
Voltage
POWER SUPPLY
LINE 45-690-0002
CN2
8
TB1
FERRITE CORE
1
22
TB1
160 70.5
CD-3732
VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
19 Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines 21 The 38-core composite cable (KH code num ber
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a 5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises
38-core cable. Table 1 provides specifications for each the following:
cable type. Table 2 provides 38-core cable, colour code
(1) 4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.
abbreviations.
(2) 32 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire.
20 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment
are to be to the following specification. Failure to use (3) 2 cores of co-axial cable.
the correct specification cables may result in impaired
equipment performance.
H. TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
P Co-axial (Low Loss) Type ECL 125 5344-719 (for long Varies 8.3mm
cable lengths only)
T or Lt/G TURQUOISE or LIGHT A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the
GREEN wire braiding.
S SLATE (grey)
26 Maximum Current Rating
R/B RED/BLUE
The maximum current ratings are as follows:
R/G RED/GREEN
2.5 A at 1000 V dc
R/Y RED/YELLOW
2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
R/W RED/WHITE
R/Bk RED/BLACK
R/Bn RED/BROWN
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW
B/W BLUE/WHITE
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK
B/O BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW
G/W GREEN/WHITE
G/Bk GREEN/BLACK
G/O GREEN/ORANGE
G/S GREEN/SLATE
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE
S/B SLATE/BLUE
Electrical
Attenuation: 60MHz 9dB/100m MAX
Attenuation: 200MHz 18.5dB/100m MAX
Impedance: 75 Ohm
Electrical
Attenuation: 60MHz 3.4dB/100m MAX
Attenuation: 100MHz 4.9dB/100m MAX
Attenuation: 200MHz 7.1dB/100m MAX
Impedance: 75 Ohm
Tx Monitor Arm
Safety Switch
Before any maintenance is carried out on
the transceiver, isolate mains supply
CD-3731 via external safety switch.
TB2
G 1 ANTENNA +27V *
W/V
Bn 2 ANTENNA +27V
S/Bn
3
2 CORE 4
FROM Tx MON.
Y 5 ANTENNA 0V
B/O
WHITE (VIDEO) CABLE -
V 6 ANTENNA 0V Strip back outer 25mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
G/Y and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
38 CORE CABLE 7 GREY (SYNC) CABLE -
Strip back outer 35mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
38 CORE COMPOSITE 8
FROM DISPLAY
VIDEO (SCREEN)
4
VIDEO (SIGNAL)
W 3
ENSURE SCREENS RB AZIMUTH SYNC (SIGNAL)
ARE CLAMPED S 2
AZIMUTH SYNC (SCREEN)
* 1
SEE INSERT
PLF
B/Bk 14 RECEIVER MONITOR
13 NEON
TB2
G 1 BRUSHLESS
W/V
MOTOR PCB
Bn
S/Bn
2 CAE-236 *
Y/Bn 3
W/Bn
S/B 4
S/G
Y 5
2 CORE B/O
FROM Tx MON. V 6
G/Y
WHITE (VIDEO) CABLE -
G/B 7 Strip back outer 25mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
G/Bk
8 GREY (SYNC) CABLE -
38 CORE CABLE Strip back outer 35mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
38 CORE COMPOSITE
FROM DISPLAY
4 VIDEO (SCREEN)
W 3 VIDEO (SIGNAL)
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED S 2 AZIMUTH SYNC (SIGNAL)
13 NEON
G
ANTENNA +24V 1 TB2
W/V
1
Bn
ANTENNA +24V 2 2
S/Bn
3
Y
ANTENNA 0V 3 4
B/O
5
V
ANTENNA 0V 4 6
G/Y
7
8
PLF
VIDEO SCREEN 4
WHITE COAX
VIDEO 3
GREY COAX
SYNC SCREEN 2
SYNC 1
BLANK TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
PLU
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
PULSE 7
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A
0V
POWER UNIT
INPUT FILTER CABLE K SHIP'S MAINS
(TB1) 110/220V
CD-3713
July 03
38-CORE HRC-A9 38-CORE CAE-A30-7
Chap 4c
(CABLE N) (CABLE N)
PLV PLDA-2 PLTA-2 PLG PLK
S S
Tx RUN 1 1 1 6
R/G R/G
Tx MUTE 2 2 2 3
B/Y B/Y
M PULSE 3 3 3 10
B/W B/W
L PULSE4 4 4 11
R/Y R/Y
TUNE5 5 5 8
R/W R/W
TUNE IND 6 6 6 9
T OR Lt/G T OR Lt/G
Tx READY 7 7 7 7
G/O G/O
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 8 9
9 9 9
B/Bk B/Bk
Rx MONITOR 10 10 10 14
G/W G/W
HEADING LINE 11 11 11 12
12 R
12 12 12
13 B }Tx MONITOR
13 13 13 ARM
R/B R/B
0V 14 14 14 5
R/Bn
4
PLW PLDA-1 PLTA-1 V/Bk
6
G & W/V (2 WIRES) R
ANTENNA +24V 1 1 5 1
Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) O
ANTENNA +24V 2 2 6 3
Y & B/O (2 WIRES) B
ANTENNA 0V 3 3 7 2
V & G/Y (2 WIRES) P
ANTENNA 0V 4 4 8 5
R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) R/Bk
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 9 7
O Bn/Bk
MODULATOR +27V 6 6 10 4
B W
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 11 1
P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) Bk
MODULATOR 0V 8 8 12 2
R/Bk
+12V 9 9
Bn/Bk TERMINALS PCB
-12V 10 10 G
W 1 TB2
MAG. HEATER 8.5V 11 11 W/V
Bk 1
MAG. HEATER 0V 12 12 Bn
2 2
S/Bn
3
Y
PLT PLDA-3 3 4
4c.20
B/O
G/Bk 5
SELECT DATA 1 1 V
W/Bn 4 6
RADAR SOURCE 2 2 G/Y
Y/Bn 7
TX CONTROL 3 3
S/B 8
STATUS 1 4 4
S/G
STATUS 2 5 5
G/B
0V 6 6
PLF
SKP SK8(10) SK7(9)
4
VIDEO WHITE COAX VIDEO 3
2
SYNC GREY COAX SYNC 1
SKO SK2(5) SK1(4) TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P TB1-A/B
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN L N
PLU
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
POWER UNIT
Amdt. 5
Original
NOTE:
FOR RUNS OF GREATER THAN
150m USE 25-CORE CABLE &
NUCLEUS DISPLAY DOUBLE UP CONNECTIONS INLINE POWER SUPPLY Mk V TRANSMITTER
12-CORE HRC-A28-1 38-CORE CAE-A30-7
INPUT PCB CABLE CABLE
(CABLE E) (CABLE N)
PLV TB1 PLG PLK
R S
Tx RUN 1 1 6
B R/G
Tx MUTE 2 2 3
G B/Y
M PULSE 3 3 10
Y B/W
L PULSE 4 4 11
W R/Y
TUNE 5 5 8
Bk R/W
TUNE IND 6 6 9
Bn T OR Lt/G
Tx READY 7 7 7
V G/O
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 9
O Y/V
4096 AZIMUTH 9 9
P B/Bk
Rx MONITOR 10 10 14
T or Lt/G G/W
HEADING LINE 11 11 12
R/B 12 R
Tx MON L 12 12 5
13 B }Tx MONITOR
Tx MON 0V 13 ARM
S Y/Bn
0V 14 4
TB2 V/Bk
6
5 R
MODULATOR +27V 1
PLW 6 O
CABLE B MODULATOR +27V 3
R 7 B
+12V 9 MODULATOR 0V 2
G 8 P
-12V 10 MODULATOR 0V 5
B 9 R/Bk
0V 12 +12V 7
10 Bn/Bk
-12V 4
W
4c.21
MAG HEATER 8.5V 11 1 TERMINALS PCB
PLU 12 Bk
MAG HEATER 0V 2
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 G
3 CABLE D ANTENNA +24V 1 TB2
GYRO PHASE 3 W/V
4 1
REF 1 Bn
5 ANTENNA +24V 2 2
REF 2 S/Bn
6 3
PULSE Y
7 ANTENNA 0V 3 4
LOG SHORT B/O
8 5
0V V
ANTENNA 0V 4 6
G/Y
7
8
LINE HEAD AMP
PLF
B
G
R
CO-AX CABLE J LOW LOSS
VIDEO
CO-AX CABLE P WHITE CO-AX
VIDDEO SCREEN
1 0V
2 +24V
SYNC SCREEN
CO-AX CABLE J LOW LOSS GREY CO-AX
0V 2
SYNC
-12V 3
CO-AX CABLE P
+12V 1
TERMINALS PCB
LINE RECEIVER AMP
1
2
TB3
POWER UNIT
CD-3715
Figure 10c - Low Speed Antenna A typical System Interconnection with Long Cables (CAE-A30-7)
May 01
Chap 4c
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4c
PLF
VIDEO SCREEN 4
WHITE COAX
VIDEO 3
GREY COAX
SYNC SCREEN 2
SYNC 1
BLANK TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
PLU
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
PULSE 7
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A
0V
POWER UNIT
CD-3724
PLF
SKP SK8(10) SK7(9)
4
VIDEO WHITE COAX VIDEO 3
2
SYNC GREY COAX SYNC 1
SKO SK2(5) SK1(4) TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P TB1-A/B
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN L N
PLU
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
PULSE 7
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A
0V
POWER UNIT
May 01
(CABLE E) (CABLE N)
Chap 4c
R S
Tx RUN 1 1 6
B R/G
Tx MUTE 2 2 3
G B/Y
M PULSE 3 3 10
Y B/W
L PULSE 4 4 11
W R/Y
TUNE 5 5 8
Bk R/W
TUNE IND 6 6 9
Bn T OR Lt/G
Tx READY 7 7 7
V G/O
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 9
O Y/V
4096 AZIMUTH 9 9
P B/Bk
Rx MONITOR 10 10 14
T or Lt/G G/W
HEADING LINE 11 11 12
R/B 12 R
Tx MON L 12 12 5
13 B }Tx MONITOR
Tx MON 0V 13 ARM
S Y/Bn
0V 14 4
TB2 V/Bk
6
5 R
MODULATOR +27V 1
PLW 6 O
CABLE B MODULATOR +27V 3
R 7 B
+12V 9 MODULATOR 0V 2
G 8 P
-12V 10 MODULATOR 0V 5
B 9 R/Bk
0V 12 +12V 7
10 Bn/Bk
-12V 4
11 W
MAG HEATER 8.5V 1 TERMINALS PCB
PLU 12 Bk
MAG HEATER 0V 2
1
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 G
3 CABLE D ANTENNA +24V 1 TB2
GYRO PHASE 3 W/V
4 1
REF 1 Bn
5 ANTENNA +24V 2 2
REF 2 S/Bn
6 3
PULSE Y
7 ANTENNA 0V 3 4
LOG SHORT B/O
8 5
0V V
ANTENNA 0V 4 6
G/Y
7
4c.24
8
LINE HEAD AMP
PLF
B
G
R
CO-AX CABLE J LOW LOSS
VIDEO
CO-AX CABLE P WHITE CO-AX
VIDDEO SCREEN
1 0V
2 +24V
SYNC SCREEN
CO-AX CABLE J LOW LOSS GREY CO-AX
0V 2
SYNC
-12V 3
CO-AX CABLE P
+12V 1
TERMINALS PCB
LINE RECEIVER AMP
1
2
TB3
POWER UNIT
Figure 13c - High Speed Antenna: A Typical System Interconnection with Long Cables (CAE-A30-8)
T(Lt/G) G/Y
G/B
7 7
G/Bk
8 8
CD-3726
Original
Amdt 2
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE CABLE
CABLE TIU Mk V
NUCLEUS 3
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB RIU
NNR-A55 CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6 WHITE COAX VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO 3
OUT IN
SKO SKG SKH
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 2
OUT IN 1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S PLA PLB PLG
BLACK 1 S
CAN HI 1 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE 2 R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE 3 B/Y
GND 3 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4 4
5 RED 5 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5 5
6 6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6 6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
7 7 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 8 G/O
GND 8 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
PLW 10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2 12
13
14 R/B
12 5 0V
4c.25
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY TERMINALS PCB
NNR-A1004
PLB
R/Bk
+15V 1 7 +15V
Bn/Bk
-15V 2 4 -15V
W
HEATERS +ve 3 1 HEATERS +ve
Bk
HEATERS -ve 4 2 HEATERS -ve
R
5 1 +27V
O
MODULATOR +27V 6 3 +27V
R/Bn 4 +27V
7
B 2 0V
8
P 5 0V
MODULATOR 0V 9
V/Bk 6 0V
10
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4516
Oct 01
Chap 4c
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4c
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
412
335
25 285 25
20
DANGER
High
Voltage
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
XXXX-XX
R1
530
570
12mm DIA
50
TYPICAL
131
CHAPTER 4D
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVI
1 This Chapter provides information on installation of the Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the
system equipment. The overall chapter comprises a front of this manual.
number of sections, each section covering the installation of
the different equipment types that comprise the overall
system. 6 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
platform when mounting an antenna/turning
2 This section covers Installation of the Mark VI Upmast mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
Transmitter/Receivers. Two versions are available: used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
(1) Low Speed - 25rpm (CAE-A37). 7 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
to be isolated during installation.
(2) High Speed - 40rpm (CAE-A45).
8 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
approximately 1 metre below the base of the Turning
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
LENGTHS
9 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
3 The following maximum waveguide lengths are to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
recommended: or rope strops.
10 Safety personnel must ensure that unauthorised
persons do not encroach on the area of work.
Std Speed High Speed 11 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
S-band 35m 20m hoisted evenly.
H
2
3'
A
I O
7
2'
2'
2
14/22 95NC
CD-0224
14/22 P 16 BN/BU A2
2T1 BK - - NEON
P 10 BN/BK TB1-1
P 16 BN/BU 14/22
24 Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position. 25 Set the dial position on the trip unit to the position
shown in Table 2.
H 26 Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the
installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to
Figure 2d for dimensions.
A
CD-0225
1.6A
25 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
1.7A
25 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
2.5A
25 rpm 220 V 45-617-1156-06
GM-0157
1.5A
40 rpm 440 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0152
1.6A
40 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
1.7A
40 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
2.5A
Original
119
180
237
3 x M10 FIXINGS
4d.5
Soft Start Unit Weight : 9.5kg
159
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m
Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m
CD-1343
May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
PSU
TB4 TB2
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
TB6 TB5
TB3
TB1
CD-0214
Amdt.2
890
FWD
418
TX MONITOR
ARM (PART OF CAE-A38)
7
38 CORE 540
CABLE MOTOR POWER CABLE
FED IN UNDERNEATH
4d.9
ON/OFF 4 FIXING HOLES
O17 THROUGH LARGE HOLE
SWITCH IN BOTTOM PLATE
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR
480
EARTHING
STUD GEARBOX FITTED WITH
ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET
Antenna Weight - 50 kg
Tx & Turning Mech - 110 kg C/L
474 ROTATION 430
USE SHIM WASHER(S)
CAE-1189 200
Compass Safe Distances: AS HEIGHT SPACER
Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m UNDER ANTI-NOISE
Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m BLOCK IF REQUIRED 180 190
Grade IV : 2.0 m
SHIP
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE INSTRUCTIONS
o o TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C
o A SMALL DEFLECTION IN
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C RUBBER MOUNTING PADS
Figure 4d - Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45), Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42) and Antennas: Installation Dimensions
Oct 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
FWD
MOTOR CABLE
38 CORE
CABLE 50mm HOLE
S BAND CO-AX IN MOUNTING
PLATE REQUIRED
FOR MOTOR CABLE
ENTRY
450 830
540
480
200
4 FIXING HOLES 430
O17
674 474
30
TUBE THICKNESS 100mm HOLE
50 IN MOUNTING
MAX 2M 12 MM MINIMUM PLATE REQUIRED
FOR S BAND
CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
490
750
500
36 Refer to Figure 6d and secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations TABLE 4 (Cont.): 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations
Bn BROWN R RED
V VIOLET B BLUE
O ORANGE G GREEN
P PINK Y YELLOW
T TURQUOISE W WHITE
R/B RED/BLUE
2.5 A at 1000 V DC
2.5 A at 440 V AC at 1600Hz.
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
4d.14
THROUGH GLAND
Original
Original
TBI COAX FROM
38-CORE TBI
COAX FROM CABLE
38-CORE
CABLE 3PLM
3PLM
3PLB
3PLB
RX MON PCB
3PLK
CABLE FROM CONTROL
CABLE FROM CONTROL Tx MON ARM BOARD
Tx MON ARM BOARD
PSU
PLA
PSU
PLA
PSU
38-CORE
4d.15
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
MODULATOR PCB
3PLM
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0211
May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
WIRING DIAGRAMS CHECKS AFTER FITTING
54 Electrical connections for upmast and downmast
transceiver systems are detailed on the following 56 The upmast turning mechanism must be checked for
wiring diagrams: security and freedom to rotate.
(1) Figure9 d - Motor Connections. 57 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
(2) Figure 10d - Soft Start Unit with In-line Power their respected units.
Supply connections.
58 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
(3) Figures 12d and 13d - Connections for Nucleus 3 chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a
systems using 38-core composite cable as mastic compound.
follows:
(1) Connections for an interswitched system, via
a Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
(2) Connections for an interswitched system, via
the Dual Interswitch Unit (DIU).
CAUTION
There are two different types of Brown motor
w hich may be used in the MkVI Turning
Mechanism. Each type of motor has different
connections. (Refer to Figure 9d for details). Take
Care to ensure that the 3-phase Motor
Connections are made correctly for the type of
motor used.
IF THE MOTOR IS IDENTIFIED AS AN "Old Style"
BROWN MOTOR (SEE BELOW), DO NOT USE THE
WIRING DIAGRAM ON THE INSIDE OF THE
COVER, AS THIS COULD DAMAGE THE MOTOR.
THE "Old Style" BROWN MOTOR MUST BE
WIRED AS SHOWN ON FIGURE 9d.
If there is any doubt about which type of Motor is
being installed, assume that it is the "Old Style"
type and wire it accordingly(see Figure 9d). If the
motor does not turn when wired as the "Old Style"
motor, then fit the links as shown for the "New
Style" motor.
55 The type of Motor can be identified as follows:
(1) First remove the wiring cover from the motor
(2) Old style motors have wires U5, V5, W5
connected to connectors U1, V1, W1 respectively.
(3) New style motors DO NOT have any wires marked
U5, V5, W5.
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
U1 W2 U1 W2
TO MONITOR
ARM
V1 U2 V1 U2
CONTROL BOARD
PLM
W1 V2 W1 V2
1 TX MON SIG
2 TX MON 0V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
3
4 SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
5
U1 W2 U1 W2
6
V1 U2 V1 U2
W1 V2 W1 V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
PLM OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO FOR 380/440V
CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1 W2 U1 W2 W5
CABLE U5
GLAND V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
V5
W1 W1 V5
MONITOR ARM FITTING V2
V2
W5
& CABLE RUN
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CD-4845
CZZ - A14/2
CABLE L TB1 TB3 CABLE L
(3-CORE
{ }
(3-CORE R or 1 1 1 R or 1
POWER) POWER)
B or 2 2 2 B or 2 3 PHASE TO
3 PHASE
CABLE B Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 AE MOTOR
SHIPS SUPPLY
(3-CORE TB2
SMALL)
R 1 +27V TO CONTACTOR
B 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
G 3 0V
CABLE K
(2-CORE
POWER)
1 PHASE
{ BN or 1
BL or 2
L 24V
N POWER
E SUPPLY
MAINS IN
SET FOR
+ 220V OR
- 110V INPUT
TB4
G/Y
0V 1 V/BK
S/BN
0V 2 G/BK
G/B
0V 3 BN/BK
P
0V 4 V
BK
0V 5 Y
0V 6 B
W/V
+27V 7 Y/V
W/BN
+27V 8 Y/BN
CABLE G (25 CORE) R/BK
+27V 9 O
OR BN
CABLE N (38 CORE) +27V 10 W
FROM +27V 11 G
DISPLAY OR
+27V 12 R
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB5
0V
R/B 1 R/B
TUNE
R/Y 2 R/Y
TUNE IND
R/W 3 R/W
MP
B/Y 4 B/Y
LP
B/W 5 B/W
RUN
S 6 S
MUTE
R/G 7 R/G
AZ
G/O 8 G/O
HL
G/W 9 G/W
Tx READY
T or Lt/G 10 T or Lt/G
Rx MON
B/BK 11 B/BK
12
TB6
CONTACTOR
B 1 S/G
0V
G 2 B/O CABLE N (38 CORE)
+27V TO
R 3 S/B
TRANSCEIVER
4
5
6
USE CABLE N (38 CORE) CABLE 7
BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND 8
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT 9
FOR CABLE RUNS OF UP TO 60 m 10
11
USE CABLE G (25 CORE) CABLE AND TWO
12
CABLE N (LOW LOSS COAXES) BETWEEN
VIDEO
THE SOFT START UNIT AND CO-AX (W) CO-AX (W)
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT
FOR CABLE RUNS GREATER THAN 60 m
SYNC
CO-AX (S) CO-AX (S)
CD-0235
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45) LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
V2
2
5
3
8
4
+27V 12 R W 12 +27V
12 TB5 13 +27V
PLC G
R/B 1 0V R/B +27V
B/O R 14
1 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
G/Y
CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
NNR-A981 B/Y 4 MP B/Y
B/W 5 LP B/W
PLB
S 6 RUN S CONTROL BOARD SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION
BOX.
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE S U1
RUN 1 R/G 7 MUTE R/G W2
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY R/G LOCATION PLM
MUTE 2 G/O 8 AZ G/O
B/Y 3 V1
MP 3 G/W 9 HL G/W 6 U2
B/W PLB
LP 4 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
R/Y W1 V2
TUNE CONTROLS 5 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4
R/W
TUNE INDICATORS 6 12 13 3
T B
Tx READY 7 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
G/O B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
AZIMUTH 8 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
N/C 9 T or Lt/G 10 NEON SIG
TB6 Tx READY
B/Bk G/W
Rx MON 10 B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL
G/W G/O OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD
HEADING LINE 11 TO TB2 G 2 0V B/O 8 AZ OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
N/C 12 R/G 7 WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B MUTE
N/C CABLE N S 6
TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
13 4 RUN
R/B (38-CORE) B/W
GROUND 14 5 5 LP U1 W2
TO B/Y 4
6 MP U5
TRANSCEIVER R/W 3 V1 U2
7 TUNE IND
R/Y 2
8 TUNE V5
R/B 1 W1
9 0V V2
PLK
10 W5
CABLE N 11 5
(38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR 2 OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD
VIDEO CONT +ve 1
OR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
COAX (W) COAX (W)
U1 W5
W2
COAX'S V1 U5
SYNC 4 0V
COAX (S) W U2
COAX (S) 3 VIDEO
W1 V5
2 SYNC
S V2
1 0V
CD-4555
Figure 11d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3 via an RIU: Interconnections Diagram
TB2
W1 V2
R
1 +27V TO CONTACTOR
NUCLEUS 3 TO TB6 B
CABLE B 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
DISPLAY G LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL)
POWER UNIT NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
SHIPS MAINS 24V
SINGLE PHASE 230V 2-CORE POWER CABLE K CABLE K BN or 1 L POWER LOCATION 2
FILTER 110/220V 1 PHASE
U1 W2
TO TB2 G/O 8
G 2 0V B/O AZ
R/G 7
U1 W2
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B MUTE
SKP SK8(10) SK7(9) CABLE N S U5
4 6 RUN
VIDEO WHITE COAX (38-CORE) B/W V1
U2
5 5 LP
TO B/Y V5
SK2(5) SK1(4) 6 4 MP W1
SKO TRANSCEIVER R/W
GREY COAX 7 3 TUNE IND W5
V2
SYNC R/Y 2
8 TUNE
R/B 1
9 0V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
PLK
10 OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
INTERSWITCH CABLE N 11 5 FOR 380/440V
38-CORE CABLE
(CABLE M)
NOTES:
1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-3844
Figure 12d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3 via a DIU: Interconnections Diagram
CHAPTER 4E
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVII (S-BAND)
1 This section provides installation information for MkVII Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the
Downmast S-Band Transceiver. front of this manual.
2 Kelvin Hughes, or appointed agents, contracts only to
supply the equipment, supervise the installation and
final connection of the equipment. The installation must be 9 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
made by a fully qualified Kelvin Hughes Radar Engineer. platform when mounting an antenna/turning
mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
3 Forward planning for positioning the various units of used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
the Radar must be made before any installation work is
carried out. A full survey is required in order to establish the 10 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
ships fitment. This may be arranged with the Technical to be isolated during installation.
Department of Kelvin Hughes or one of the approved 11 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
agencies. Details of Agencies worldwide can be found in servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
Publication KH 400. approximately 1 metre below the base of the Turning
Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE 12 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
LENGTHS to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
or rope strops.
4 The following maximum waveguide lengths are
recommended: 13 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
encroach on the area of work.
14 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
Std Speed High Speed lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
hoisted evenly.
S-band 35m 20m
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
UPMAST TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41/42)
5 Compass safe distances are stated on labels on all
units and are as follows: 15 The Upmast Turning Mechanism should be installed in
such a po si tion where Blind Arcs, caused by
Grade I Grade II obstructions, i.e. masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or
(0.25 degree) (1 degree) minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions
MkVII Transceiver 1.4 m 0.8 m can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns
especially in close proximity to land.
TRANSCEIVER AND TURNING MECHANISMS 16 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must not be
mounted where the temperature exceeds 70oC.
6 The MkVII S-Band downmast Transceiver can be used
with the MkVI Turning Mechanism (low speed - 25 rpm 17 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of
(CAE-A42) or high speed - 40 rpm (CAE-A41) versions). For ships flexible communication aerials to avoid damage
completeness the installation procedure in this document to both.
uses the MkVI Turning Mechanism. Two versions of the 18 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be mounted
turning mechanism are provided: more than 914 mm above any flat surface, when the
(1) 25 rpm CAE-A42 for normal applications. flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by the
antenna.
(2) 50 rpm CAE-A41 for high speed craft.
19 The Upmast Turn ing Mech a nism must not be
7 The electronics for the downmast transceiver are positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic
housed in a separate bulkhead mounted enclosure. compass or D/F aerial, etc.
The downmast transceiver is connected to the turning
mechanism, via semi-rigid coaxial cable.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9) 22 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna
turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum
20 The fol lowing points must be con sid ered when length, i.e. Less than 35m, with as few bends and twists as
selecting a suitable site for the Downmast Transceiver: possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used
to eliminate the effects of vibration.
(1) The transceiver is designed for bulkhead
mounting.
SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14)
(2) Consideration must be given to accessibility for
servicing and protection from adverse conditions. 23 The Soft Start Unit must be sited near the transceiver.
For ease of maintenance, the top of the
transceiver should not be mounted more than 24 The Soft Start Unit must be sited to allow removal of
1.6m above the deck. the front cover.
(3) Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit
for cable entries, and above the unit to allow for OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600)
connection of the semi-rigid co-axial cable
coupling. 25 The Mains Isolator must be sited adjacent to the
display or in the area of the operators control room and
NOTE: connected in parallel with the main display.
The semi-rigid co-axial cable has a minimum bend radius
of 100 mm (4")
(4) The transceiver should be mounted in a position INSTALLATION
which allows for ventilation and cooling.
(5) Do not fit the transceiver in an acoustic, noise SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14)
sensitive area, i.e. Bridge or Operations Room.
(6) Do not fit the transceiver in close proximity to any WARNING
magnetic compass or D/F aerial.
(7) Connecting cables between the display and the ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE
transceiver should be limited to a length of 65 VICINITY OF THE SOFT START UNIT ARE
metres. Where the distance between transceiver ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES
and display exceeds 65 metres, advice must be
obtained from Kelvin Hughes Ltd. Details of Line
Amplifiers and Receivers for use with long cable
runs are provided in Annex A to this manual. Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit To Soft Start Unit
(CZZ-A14)
21 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna
turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum 26 The thermal overload trip unit is supplied with the
length, i.e. less than 35m, with as few bends and twists as gearbox fitting kit.
possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used
to eliminate the effects of vibration. 27 Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the four
captive screws.
28 The trip unit, shown in Figure 1e, clips on the side of the
contactor and is se cured in po si tion with re lay
H
2
3'
A
I O
7
2'
2'
2
14/22 95NC
CD-0224
14/22 P 16 BN/BU A2
2T1 BK - - NEON
P 10 BN/BK TB1-1
P 16 BN/BU 14/22
30 shown in Table 2.
Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position.
FITTING THE SOFT START UNIT
32 Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the
installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to
H Figure 2e for dimensions.
A
CD-0225
Original
119
180
237
3 x M10 FIXINGS
4e.5
Soft Start Unit Weight : 9.5kg
159
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m
Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m
CD-1343
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
UPMAST TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A42/41) 36 With reference to Figures 4e and 5e, install the upmast
turning mechanism as follows:
(1) Fit the coupling element and sealing ring to the
WARNING antenna connector.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE (2) Fit the antenna to the upmast turning mechanism,
VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER/TURNING ensuring that the connectors are aligned, and
MECHANISM ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY loosely secure using the eight M10 retaining bolts,
washers and nuts.
INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE.
CAUTION
CAUTION
When Rotating The Antenna Do Not Apply Excessive
When Unpacking The Antenna, Ensure That The Force.
Semi-rigid Co-axial Cables Are Not Kinked, Crushed
Or Bent. Support The Antenna Near Its Centre When Ensure that the Semi-rigid Coax Assembly, on The
Lifting It Out Of Its Packing And When Fitting It Into Un der side Of The An tenna, Is Not Crushed Or
Position On The Turning Mechanism. Do Not Handle Damaged.
The Antenna By The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cable Input.
CAUTION
The Antenna Window Must NOT Be Painted.
Original
890
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
418 FWD
MOTOR POWER CABLE
FED IN UNDERNEATH
THROUGH LARGE HOLE
7 IN BOTTOM PLATE
12 CORE
CABLE S BAND CO-AX 150
ON/OFF
SWITCH
4e.9
* IF S BAND CO-AX NOT FED THROUGH
HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE RAISE
EARTHING FITTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR
UNIT TO ALLOW 150mm CLEARANCE
STUD GEARBOX FITTED WITH 540
ANTI-NOISE MOUNT FEET 4 FIXING HOLES
O17 480
Antenna Weight (2.8m) 45kg
(3.9m) 50 kg
Tx & Turning Mech 100 kg USE SHIM WASHER(S)
CAE-1189 C/L 430
AS HEIGHT SPACER ROTATION
Compass Safe Distances: UNDER ANTI-NOISE 474
Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m BLOCK IF REQUIRED 200
Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m
Grade IV : 2.0 m
SHIP 180 190
INSTRUCTIONS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE TIGHTEN BOLT TO PRODUCE
o o
CD-1345
}
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
FWD
MOTOR CABLE
38 CORE
CABLE 50mm HOLE
S BAND CO-AX IN MOUNTING
PLATE REQUIRED
FOR MOTOR CABLE
ENTRY
450 830
540
480
200
4 FIXING HOLES 430
O17
674 474
30
TUBE THICKNESS 100mm HOLE
50 IN MOUNTING
MAX 2M 12 MM MINIMUM PLATE REQUIRED
FOR S BAND
CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
490
750
500
TOP VIEW
85 250
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
420 260
88.4 122.6
19
670
720 645 BETWEEN
FIXING
CENTRES
15.8mm SLOT
25
CABLE ENTRIES
CD-4100
BOTTOM OF
ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL
2mm - 5mm
OF THREAD IS
PROTRUDING
MINIMUM BENDING
RADIUS 80mm
*3 SPRING
WASHERS
*"O" RING
*COUPLING ELEMENT RF
(INNER MALE COUPLING)
*THESE ITEMS
SUPPLIED AS
FITTING PACK
CODE ZV 9758
SEAL PLATES
CAE-1437 TOP OF
TRANSCEIVER
CTX-A9
BOTTOM OF
TURNING MECH
CD-4043
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL
(20-281-1063-11)
SPACER (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1343)
SEAL (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1344)
SPACER (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1343)
DECKGLAND BODY
(TCR 1340)
GASKET
(TCR 1342)
DECK PLATE
(TCR 1341)
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL
(20-281-1063-11)
(A)
(see next Figure)
CD-1218
150
FITTING THE COAXIAL DECK GLAND (TCR A37)
67
(see previous figure) and (E) and proceed as follows:
4) Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body GASKET (TCR 1342)
and temporarily secure clamp plates (TCR 1345) using
the remaining six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws WOOD BLOCK
with washers. (C) COMPOSITION
WOODEN OR COMPOSITION & STEEL DECKS DECK
WELD
COMPOSITION DECKS
FLANGED TUBE
To fit the deck gland to a composition deck, refer to previous SHIPYARD SUPPLY
figure and Diagram (D) and proceed as follows:
DECK
WELD
5) Fit and tighten the six M6 x 25 mm screws in the clamp STEEL DECK
plate (TCR 1345) to expand the seal. DO NOT OVER
TIGHTEN as this may cause distortion of the cable.
CD-1219
53 Refer to Figure 10e and secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
C Not used
D Not used
F Not used
G Not used
H. TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
J Not used
TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations TABLE 4 (Cont.): 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations
2.5 A at 1000 V DC
2.5 A at 440 V AC at 1600Hz.
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
4e.20
THROUGH GLAND
Original
TBI
Original
TBI
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
PLA
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
12-CORE
CABLE
4e.21
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
PLA
TBI
12-CORE
CABLE
CD-0212
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
PLE
PLC
PLB
PLD
SKW
PLV
PLP
PLA
1TB1
PLE PLG
PLX
PLK
PLB
PLH N L
LOAD
PLN
EMC
PLT PLS PLM FILTER
PLD PLC LINE
2/3 CORE TO
PLB SOFT START OR
PLA PLE PLC PLD INVERTER UNIT
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
(NUCLEUS 2) OR
12 CORE (NUCLEUS 3)
(OR DIRECT IF RS232 USED)
RS232 2 CORE
(OPTION) POWER CABLE
PRE-PULSE 12 CORE TO
(OPTION) TURNING MECHANISM
12 CORE CABLE (CAN BUS) 38 CORE CABLE
FROM NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 DISPLAY
NOTE: IF 38 CORE CONTROL CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 OR 12 CORE CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 3
USED VIDEO AND SYNC FORM PART OF THE CABLE.
IF RS232 CONTROL CABLE USED, VIDEO AND SYNC ARE SEPARATE CABLES
ONLY ONE OF 38 CORE, 12 CORE (CAN BUS) OR RS232 CABLES USED
A
A
PRE-PULSE VID 2 VID 1
A
B
EXT-SYNC SYNC 2 SYNC 1
VIEW SHOWING
CD-4036 COAXIAL CONNECTORS
Figure 13e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): PCB Location and Cableform Routing
74 Electrical connections for upmast and downmast (1) First remove the wiring cover from the motor
transceiver systems are detailed on the following (2) Old style motors have wires U5, V5, W5
wiring diagrams: connected to connectors U1, V1, W1 respectively.
(1) Figure 14e - Motor Connection (See CAUTION (3) New style motors DO NOT have any wires marked
below). U5, V5, W5.
(2) Figure 15e - Connections between the downmast
Transceiver CTX-A9 and the upmast Turning
Mechanism and Soft Start Unit (if fitted).
(a) For details of connections between the Soft
Start Unit and the Turning Mechanism for
MkVI T urning Mechanis ms ref er to CHECKS AFTER FITTING
publication KH 1250. Figure 18 shows a
typical arrangement with a Nucleus 3 Display
75 The upmast turning mechanism must be checked for
and Dual Interswitch Unit. Figure 21 shows a se cu rity and free dom to ro tate. The downmast
typical arrangement with a Nucleus 3 Display transceiver must be checked for security, accessibility, and
and Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU). cabling runs.
(b) For details of connections between the Soft 76 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
Start Unit or Inverter and the Turning entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
Mechanism for Mk VII Turning Mechanisms their respected units.
refer to publication KH 1253.
77 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
(3) Figures 16e and 17e - Connections for Nucleus 3 chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a
systems using 38-core composite cable as mastic compound.
follows:
(a) Connections between the CT X-A9
Transceiver and the Nucleus 3 Display.
(b) Connections for an interswitched system, via
the Dual Interswitch Unit.
(4) Figures 19e and 20e - Connections for Nucleus 3
systems using 12-core composite cable and the
CANbus interface as follows:
(a) Connections between the CT X-A9
Transceiver and the Nucleus 3 Display.
(b) Connections for an interswitched system, via
the Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
NOTE:
RS232 serial control can be used for changing the
programme of the Tx Microcontroller PCB. It does not
control the transceiver.
CAUTION
There are two different types of Brown motor
w hich may be used in the MkVI Turning
Mechanism. Each type of motor has different
connections. (Refer to Figure 14e for details).
Take Care to ensure that the 3-phase Motor
Connections are made correctly for the type of
motor used.
IF THE MOTOR IS IDENTIFIED AS AN "Old Style"
BROWN MOTOR (SEE BELOW), DO NOT USE THE
WIRING DIAGRAM ON THE INSIDE OF THE
COVER, AS THIS COULD DAMAGE THE MOTOR.
THE "Old Style" BROWN MOTOR MUST BE
WIRED AS SHOWN ON FIGURE 14e.
If there is any doubt about which type of Motor is
being installed, assume that it is the "Old Style"
type and wire it accordingly(see Figure 14e). If the
motor does not turn when wired as the "Old Style"
motor, then fit the links as shown for the "New
Style" motor.
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
U1 W2 U1 W2
TO MONITOR
ARM
V1 U2 V1 U2
CONTROL BOARD
PLM
R W1 V2 W1 V2
1 TX MON SIG
2 TX MON 0V
B
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
3
4 SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
5
U1 W2 U1 W2
6
V1 U2 V1 U2
W1 V2 W1 V2
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
PLM OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO FOR 380/440V
CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1 W2 U1 W2 W5
CABLE U5
GLAND V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
V5
W1 W1 V5
MONITOR ARM FITTING V2
V2
W5
& CABLE RUN
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CD-1349
TB1
3 PHASE R 1
SHIPS B 2
Y 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
CABLE L TURNING MECHANISM
Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42
CTX-A9
3 CORE 3 CORE
(CABLE B) (CABLE L)
1TB1
Bn
SW1 (+27V) 1 1
V
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 2
3
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
Y 7
HEADING LINE 4
W 8
0V 5
R 1 Tx MON 0V
Tx MONITOR B
ARM 2 Tx MON SIG
12 CORE
(CABLE E)
CONTROL PANEL
PLV
1
2
3
4 2PLB
5 T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 1
6
7 R/B
MODULATOR 0V 2
8
9 POWER UNIT
10
11
12
13 THESE CABLES ARE
14 SEPARATE COAXES
IF 38-CORE CABLE
CONNECTION NOT USED
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX
SYNC 1 SYNC 1
GREY COAX
PLF FILTER
2 L
NAVSYS I/P 2-CORE MAINS
6 CABLE A N
INTERFACE RTN POWER CABLE
E
PLU
1 3PLV
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 1
3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 2
4 DIAGNOSTIC
REF 1 PORT 3
5
REF 2 4
6
PULSE 7 CONTROL PCB
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A 3PLX
0V
1 CAN H
2 CAN L
3 GROUND
CANBUS OPTIONS
POWER UNIT 4 CAN H
5 CAN L
INPUT FILTER CABLE K 6 GROUND
SHIP'S MAINS
(TB1) 110/220V CONTROL PCB
CD-4432
Amdt.5
INPUT PCB CABLE CABLE
(CABLE N) (CABLE N)
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B-2 3PLB
1 S S
Tx RUN 1 1 6
2 Bn Bn
Tx MUTE 2 2 7
3 Y Y
M PULSE 3 3 4
4 W W
L PULSE 4 4 5
5 B B
TUNE 5 5 2
6 G G
TUNE IND 6 6 3
7 P P
Tx READY 7 7 10
8 R T
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 8
9
9 9
10 V V
Rx MONITOR 10 10 11
11 O O
HEADING LINE 11 11 9
12
12 12
13
13 13
14 Bk Bk
14 14 1
CONTROL PCB
PLV PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1
1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) 3 3
4 V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 1
6 O 6 6
7 B R/B
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 2
8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 8
9 R/Bk POWER UNIT
9 9
10 Bn/Bk 10 10
11 W 11 11
12 Bk 12 12
4e.27
SKP
VIDEO SK8(10) SK7(9) 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX WHITE COAX
SKO
SYNC SK2(5) SK1(4) 1 SYNC 1
GREY COAX GREY COAX
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN L N L N
FILTER
PLU
1 2-CORE MAINS L
POWER UNIT
CD-4433
July 03
Chap 4e
KH 2020
July 03
Chap 4e
KH 2020
GEARBOX
SOFT START UNIT (CAE-A42/CAE-A41)
CABLE L
(CZZ-A14) (3-CORE POWER)
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 AE MOTOR TB
CABLE L R or 1 1 1 R or 1 U1 PHASE 1
SEE
(3 CORE POWER) B or 2 2 2 B or 2 V1 PHASE 2 INSERT A
3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 W1 PHASE 3
3-CORE
CABLE B
TB2
R
+27V TO CONTACTOR 1 LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
NOTES: G
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 2
THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED B OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
0V 3 HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO FOR 380/440V
CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
U1 W2 U1 W2 W5
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Mk VII TRANSMITTER
U5
38-CORE (HRC-A9) 38-CORE CTX-A9 V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
INPUT PCB CABLE CABLE
(CABLE N) (CABLE N) V5
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B-2 3PLB W1 W1 V5
V2
1 S S V2
Tx RUN 1 1 6 W5
2 Bn Bn
Tx MUTE 2 2 7
3 Y Y
M PULSE 3 3 4 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
4 W W
L PULSE 4 4 5
5 B B
TUNE 5 5 2 NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
6 G G HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
TUNE IND 6 6 3
7 P P
Tx READY 7 7 10 U1
8 R T U1 W2 W2
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 8
9
9 9
10 V V V1
Rx MONITOR 10 10 11 V1 U2 U2
11 O O
HEADING LINE 11 11 9
12
12 12
13 W1 V2 W1 V2
13 13
14 Bk Bk
14 14 1
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
CONTROL PCB
PLV PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1
1 SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) U1 W2 U1 W2
4e.28
3 3
4 V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 1 V1 U2 V1 U2
6 O 6 6
7 B R/B
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 2
8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) W1 V2 W1 V2
8 8
9 R/Bk POWER UNIT
9 9
10 Bn/Bk 10 10 3SKK
11 W LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
11 11 3
12 Bk 12 12 2
4 1TB1
SW1 1 Bn 1 SAFETY SWITCH CONT +ve
MOTOR START 5 V 2 POLE 1 CONTACTOR
CONTROL PCB Bk 3 SAFETY SWITCH +27V
SKP SK8(10) 4 POLE 2
VIDEO WHITE COAX SK7(9) 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX 9SKA HL PCB
SKO SK2(5) 3SKM B 1 Tx MON 0V
SYNC GREY COAX SK1(4) 1 SYNC 1 +27V 6 R 2 Tx MON (SIG)
GREY COAX
NEON SIG 1 R 3 Tx MON (SIG)
PLF
NEON RTN 2 B 4 Tx MON (0V)
2 5 +27V
NAVSYS I/P TB1-A/B TB2-A/B AZIMUTH 3 G 6 AZ
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN L N L N HL 4 Y 7 HL
0V 5 W 8 0V
FILTER CONTROL PCB
PLU 12 CORE
Amdt.5
KH 2020
Chap 4e
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CTX-A9
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX
VIDEO VIDEO 1
SKO
GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 1
POWER UNIT
2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2
2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
E
CD-4559
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
(CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
NNR-A55 CTX-A9
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1
OUT IN
SKO
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18
SYNC SYNC 1
OUT IN
CONTROL PCB
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX
BLACK 1 1
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 CONTROL PCB
6 6
6
4e.30
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB
7
GREEN 8 8
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH
PLW
+24V 1 POWER UNIT
(MOTOR) 2 2PLB
1
12 ON/OFF
2
FILTER
CD-4560
Amdt.2
Amdt.5
SOFT START UNIT GEARBOX
CABLE L
(CZZ-A14) (3-CORE (CAE-A42)/(CAE-A41)
POWER)
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 AE MOTOR TB
CABLE L
R or 1 1 1 R or 1 U1 PHASE 1
(3 CORE POWER) SEE
B or 2 2 2 B or 2 V1 PHASE 2 INSERT A
3 PHASE SHIPS
Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 W1 PHASE 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
TB2 CABLE B
R
+27V TO CONTACTOR 1
B LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN 2
0V G OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR OLD STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
3
HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO FOR 380/440V
CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
Mk VII TRANSMITTER
U1 W2 U1 W2 W5
CTX-A9
U5
V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
COMPOSITE
V5
COMPOSITE 12-CORE W1 W1 V5
12-CORE (CABLE R) V2
V2
(CABLE R) W5
NUCLEUS 3 RIU
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
INPUT PCB
NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR NEW STYLE BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
SKP HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1 U1 W2 U1 W2
OUT IN
SKO
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18
SYNC V1 U2 V1 U2
OUT IN SYNC 1
W1 V2 W1 V2
4e.31
CONTROL PCB
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S 3PLX LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
BLACK 1 1
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2 SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX. SEIPEE MOTOR HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX.
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4 U1 W2 U1 W2
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 CONTROL PCB
6 6
6 V1 U2 V1 U2
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB
7
GREEN 8 8
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
W1 V2 W1 V2
8 AZIMUTH
PLW 3SKK
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
CABLE A
(2-CORE)
TO Tx MON ARM
July 03
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
INTRODUCTION
78 Where the distance between the transceiver and the
display is greater than 65 metres up to a maximum of
180 metres, low loss co-axial cables must be used as
specified below.
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
CHAPTER 4F
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVII (X-BAND)
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE 9 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
LENGTHS platform when mounting an antenna/turning
mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
4 The following maximum waveguide lengths are used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
recommended: 10 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
to be isolated during installation.
11 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
Std Speed High Speed servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
approximately a metre below the base of the Turning
X-band 28m 20m Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
12 A flat steel plate (12 mm thick approx.), pre-drilled (in
accordance with Figure 1f) to accommodate the
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES Turning Mechanism and the cable and waveguide from the
Transceiver. The steel plate must be mounted horizontally
5 Compass safe distances are stated on labels on all and braced with struts for rigidity.
units and are as follows:
13 The plate has to be sited in a clear area where the
Grade I Grade II turning Antenna cannot be obstructed by any cables,
(0.25 degree) (1 degree) mast halyards etc.
MkVII Transceiver 1.4 m 0.8 m 14 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
TRANSCEIVER AND TURNING MECHANISMS or rope strops.
15 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
6 There are two ver sions of the MkVII X-Band encroach on the area of work.
Transceiver and Turning Mechanism:
16 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
(1) 25 kW X-Band, Downmast 24 rpm (CTX-A8 lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
T ransceiv er and CAE- A30-6 T urning hoisted evenly.
Mechanism).
(2) 25 kW X-Band, Downmast 40 rpm (CTX-A8
T ransceiv er and CAE- A30-5 T urning
Mechanism).
20 The Turning Mechanism must not be mounted where 24 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna
the temperature exceeds 70oC. turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum
length, i.e. less than 35m, with as few waveguide bends and
21 The Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of ships twists as possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to
flexible communication aerials to avoid damage to be used to eliminate the effects of vibration.
both.
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600)
25 The Mains Isolator must be sited adjacent to the
display or in the area of the operators control room and
connected in parallel with the main display.
CAE-A30-6) (8) The connecting cable from the Turning Unit to the
Transceiver should be kept to a maximum of 65
26 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism are specified metres. Do not exceed 65m without consulting the
and supplied separately. Refer to Figure 1f of this Kelvin Hughes Technical Department.
chapter for outline dimensions and fixing centres. The
following criteria are to be observed when installing: (9) Fit the Monitor Arm (if supplied) onto the side of the
casing and secure the clamp with the four retaining
(1) For turning mechanisms mounted in excess of screws. The monitor arm cable is passed through
1.8m above the deck, it is recommended that a the smaller cable gland and clamped. The cable
service platform and guard rail are fitted. screen is to be earthed by the ferrules in the cable
gland assembly.
(2) Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to
prevent corrosion between the platform and the
turning mechanism. Waveguide Installation
27 Waveguide installation information is detailed in
paragraph 32.
CAUTION
Sep 03
Chap 4f
KH 2020
MONITOR ARM
155
SEE INSTRUCTION 1
562
FWD
FIXING BOLTS WAVEGUIDE
3 x M12 TB1 CONNECTION
EARTHING
STRAP CABLE ENTRY
CABLE ENTRY 145
( DIAMETER OF CABLE GLAND - 22mm ) (at rear)
380 18mm off centre
290 34mm from base
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES 290 325
Turning Mechanism Weight : 22kg
Antenna (1.3m) Weight: 10kg
4f.4
Antenna (1.8m) Weight: 14kg DANGER
Antenna (2.4m) Weight : 21kg
MOUNTING BOLT HIGH VOLTAGE
Power Consumption : 140W (24 RPM) 'FOOTPRINT'
200W (40 RPM)
290
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE 14 mm
o o
-25 C to +70 C
Relative Humidity 95% : +40oC
OFF
ON
POSITION OF
ANTENNA ARRAY SAFETY SWITCH
1 Assemble Antenna Array to Turning Mechanism using 6 x M6 bolts, nuts and washers provided.
CABLE ENTRY
5 Pass the cable through the rear of the cable glands, use spanner provided to tighten gland nut
Do not overtighten.
CD-3906
Amdt 6
KH 2020
Chap 4f
RIDGID OR FLEXABLE
WAVEGUIDE
450
290
450
290
12 MM MINIMUM
290 14 mm
Mounting
31 Fit the transceiver to the securing bulkhead using the
installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to
Figure 4f for dimensions.
TOP VIEW
85 250
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
88.4 122.6
420 260
19
670
720 645 BETWEEN
FIXING
CENTRES
15.8mm SLOT
25
CABLE ENTRIES
CD-4101
Original
FLARE RING
MINIMUM BENDING RADII, mm (in)
CLAMPING NUT
ALIGNMENT PIN E PLANE 200(8)
HOLES SMALLER "O" RING H PLANE 480 (19)
(FITS IN GROOVE) MAXIMUM TWIST, DEGREES/mn(DEGREES/ft) 3(1)
GAS PORT DIMENSIONS OUTER JACKET, mm (in) 33.5 x 22.9 (1.32 x 0.90)
WEIGHT, kg/m (lb/ft) 0.50 (0.33)
CLAMP OUTER
(FITS OUTSIDE PLASTIC
FLANGE WHEN JACKET
ASSEMBLED)
4f.11
SEALING
WASHER
CD-3782
HOLE
FLANGE
HALVES
INNER
COPPER
RUBBER
BOOT
DECK FEED-THRU
(PART No 45-748-817)
May 01
Chap 4f
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4f
Tools and Materials Required for Assembly grease to the outside surface of the gasket (refer to Figure
3). Clean any silicone grease from the exposed copper
Knife, Metal snips, Teflon tape, Bottle brush, Small flat file, using solvent.
Hacksaw (fine blade), Rule (150 mm), Mallet (plastic or
nylon head), Wrenches (two needed: adjustable 3/4" to 2" & FLARE RING
1 15/16"), Solvent, Comothene, Vythene or other non-
flammable cleaning fluid.
SILICONE
APPROX. 150
GREASE Step 5) Slip recessed side of flare ring over the gasket.
LARGE "O" RING
Alignment pin holes in the flare ring and compression ring
must be in line. The flare ring must be pushed against the
compression ring as tight as possible (refer to Figures 3 & 4.
Approximate opening between the flare ring and the
compression ring should be as shown).
Step 6) Use metal snips to make cuts into the end of the
waveguide at 3 mm intervals to form tabs (see Figure 4).
CLAMPING NUT
24
Make the cuts as close as possible to the flare ring.
FIGURE 1
FLARE RING 2 mm
ALIGNMENT
PIN HOLE
FIGURE 2
Step 4) Turn the gasket inside out and place over end of the
waveguide. Apply very thin coating of silicone grease to the
gasket threads, then flip the gasket over and butt up against
the compression ring. Apply a thin coating of silicone FIGURE 5
CD-3783
Step 8) Place smaller "O" ring gasket into groove in Step 10) The waveguide should be checked for leaks
connector body. Do not apply silicone grease to this whenever connectors are attached, when connector
gasket. Apply a thin coating of silicone grease to the attached waveguide is received on site or after
rear outer surface of the compression ring. This will installation. A dependable method is to apply a soap
allow the large "O" ring gasket inside the clamping nut to solution to cable connectors and pneumatic fixings and
slide over the compression ring. checking for bubbles. When mating two UG type
flanges with gasket grooves, two flange gaskets must be
Step 9) (Refer to Figure 6). Place connector body used. If a flange with a gasket groove is mated to a
against flare ring. The alignment pins must be properly flange without a groove, use only one gasket. Mating
seated in the alignment holes of the flare ring and the two EIA type flanges, use only one flange gasket. Do
compression ring. Untape the clamping nut and slide it not apply silicone grease to flange gaskets.
over the assembled parts and screw it onto the
connector body. Tighten the connection with wrenches. Caution!
Use the adjustable wrench on the flattened portion of the When pressure fitting is connected to gas port on
connector body to hold it in position whilst the clamping waveguide connector, avoid excessive tightening.
nut is tightened. Only turn the clamping nut; do not Apply 1 1/2 turns of Teflon tape to threads and tighten
turn the connector body. fitting to only 2 1/2 foot-pounds (0.35 kg-m), which is
CD-3784 FIGURE 6
CLAMP
(FITS OUTSIDE
FLANGE WHEN
45O
FLANGE
HALVES
RUBBER
BOOT
Step 1) Cut an 80 mm entrance hole in the deck for the Step 6) Position the flange halves in the groove and
rubber boot. align the holes with those in the rubber boot. Add the
mounting fixings. Use 1/4" bolts, flat washers, lock
Step 2) Insert the waveguide through the entrance hole washers, and nuts obtained locally. Place a flat washer
and connect it to the components inside. against the inside of the deck and a sealing washer
under the bolt head as shown in the illustration. Tighten
Step 3) Apply silicone grease to the hole and slit of the the fixings.
boot. Place the rubber boot around the waveguide.
Slide the boot into the entrance hole and mark the Step 7) Add the adjustable clamp as shown and tighten
locations of the 8 equally spaced mounting holes. it to ensure a leakproof seal.
CD-3785
THREADED ROD
SUPPORT KIT 1
(5 PER KIT) TORQUE
1 (45-748-819) 7-14 N-m
(5-10 lb-ft) 2
2
3
1000
1 3
G G
G
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
37 Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a
38-core cable. Table 4 provides specifications for each
cable type. Table 5 provides 38-core cable, colour code
abbreviations.
38 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment
are to be to the following specification. Failure to use
the correct specification cables may result in impaired
equipment performance.
C Not used
D Not used
F Not used
H. TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
J Not used
L Not used
ABBREVIATION COLOUR
ABBREVIATION COLOUR
W/R WHITE/RED
R RED
WHITE CO-AX
B BLUE
SLATE CO-AX
G GREEN
N/C NO CONNECTION
Y YELLOW
P PINK
Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm
diameter tinned copper wire.
T TURQUOISE Nominal cross-section area of conductor
= 0.5 mm2.
S SLATE (grey) Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm
Nominal thickness of insulation = 0.45 mm
R/B RED/BLUE
Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm
R/G RED/GREEN Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm
Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
R/Y RED/YELLOW (2) Braided Screen
R/W RED/WHITE The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape
over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter
R/Bk RED/BLACK tinned copper wire.
(3) Outer Sheath
R/Bn RED/BROWN
A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW wire braiding.
(4) Maximum Current Rating
B/W BLUE/WHITE
The maximum current ratings are as follows:
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK 2.5 A at 1000 V dc
2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
B/O BLUE/ORANGE
S/Bn SLATE/BROWN
Outer diameter:10 mm (0.39 in.).
(2) Remove fuses from mains isolators. (5) Place seal over cable and onto outer covering at
the gland housing.
(3) On the Turning Mechanism, set the ON/OFF
switch to OFF. (6) Insert the two screening ferrules between seal and
screen at gland as shown.
46 The casing of the upmast turning mechanism must be
securely earthed to the platform with braided copper (7) Place plastic washer and gland nut over cable and
wire. screw assembly into gland housing and secure
screening and cable with P clip, unwrap paper
47 The casing of the downmast transceiver must be insulation back to screening and discard.
securely earthed to the deck or bulkhead with braided
copper wire. (8) Route cable strands to TB1, TB2 (CAE-A30-5
only) and SKA. Note that the Tx Monitor Arm cable
48 Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing is also connected to SKA. Refer to Figures 12f
through the transceiver. Make sure that there is and 13f for wiring details.
sufficient slack to allow for extreme movements during 56 Loca tion of PCBs and cableform rout ing in the
sudden shock to the vessel. downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 8f.
49 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
their respected units.
50 Fit cable through gland in accordance with the diagram
shown on Figure 7f.
COVER REMOVAL
51 Before any electrical connections can be made, covers
have to be removed from the following equipment:
(1) Downmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism.
(2) Optional Mains Isolator.
Turning Mechanism
52 Remove the four captive screws securing the rear
cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the
cover.
Downmast Transceiver
53 Release the six captive screws securing the cover to
the Downmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
38 Core Cable
Seal
Plastic Washer
Tx Mon Arm Cable
TB1
Secure cable
to P' clip 8
300mm Approx.
1 1
TB2
Casting
Gland
FWD
Tx Monitor Arm
SKA
TB1 TB2
Safety Switch Cables routed to TB1,
Before any maintenance is carried out on TB2 (CAE-A30-5 only)
the transceiver, isolate mains supply and SKA. Secure with
via external safety switch. 'P' clips
PLA
Connect 12 or 25 core cable
and 2 core cable to SKA
Cable run to
PLA from gland
TB1
Cable Glands
REAR VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED, SHOWING LOCATIONS OF TB1, TB2 AND SKA
CD-3931
8
SKW
PLV
PLP
PLA
1TB1
PLE PLG
1
PLX
PLK
PLB
PLH N L
LOAD
PLN
EMC
PLT PLS PLM FILTER
PLD PLC LINE
PLB
PLA PLE PLC PLD
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
(NUCLEUS 2) OR
12 CORE (NUCLEUS 3)
(OR DIRECT IF RS232 USED)
RS232 2 CORE
(OPTION) POWER CABLE
PRE-PULSE 12/25 CORE TO
(OPTION) TURNING MECHANISM
38 CORE CABLE
12 CORE CABLE (CAN BUS)
FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 DISPLAY
FROM NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY
NOTE: IF 38 CORE CONTROL CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 OR 12 CORE CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 3
USED VIDEO AND SYNC FORM PART OF THE CABLE.
IF RS232 CONTROL CABLE USED, VIDEO AND SYNC ARE SEPARATE CABLES
ONLY ONE OF 38 CORE, 12-CORE (CAN BUS) OR RS232 CABLES USED
A
A
PRE-PULSE VID 2 VID 1
A
B
EXT-SYNC SYNC 2 SYNC 1
VIEW SHOWING
CD-3932 COAXIAL CONNECTORS
3SKK
MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn 3
MOTOR START RTN 2 V 4
5
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
G
AZIMUTH 3 2
Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
0V 5 4
R
Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
B
ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
12 CORE
SMALL
CABLE
(CABLE E)
2 CORE
FROM Tx MON.
12 CORE CABLE
12 CORE
FROM TX/RX
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED
Bk 5 +27V
8 NEON
V 4 MOTOR START (RTN)
7 NEON (0V)
Bn 3 MOTOR START (+27V)
B 6 NEON RETURN
S 2 MOTOR 0V
R 5 NEON SIGNAL T or LtG
O 1 MOTOR +VE (+26V)
W 4 0V P
1
9SKA
3SKK 1TB1
MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn 5
MOTOR START RTN 2 V 6
3
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
G
AZIMUTH 3 2
Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
0V 5 4
R
Tx MONITOR B 7 Tx MON 0V
25 CORE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
COMPOSITE
CABLE
(CABLE G)
2 CORE
FROM Tx MON.
25 CORE CABLE
25 CORE
FROM TX/RX
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED
TB2
O 1
R/W
P 2 8 NEON
R/Bk
V 6 MOTOR START (RTN)
R/B 3 7 NEON (0V)
R/Bn
Bn 5 MOTOR START (+27V)
R/Y 4 B 6 NEON RETURN
R/G
4
T or LtG 5 R 5 NEON SIGNAL
B/Bk Bk 3 +27V
S 6 W 0V
4
B/O
B/Y 7 Y HEADING LINE 1TB1
3
G/Y
B/W 8 G 2 AZIMUTH
G/W
1
9SKA
CONTROL PANEL
PLV
1
2
3
4 2PLB
5 T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 1
6
7 R/B
MODULATOR 0V 2
8
9 POWER UNIT
10
11
12
13 THESE CABLES ARE
14 SEPARATE COAXES
IF 38-CORE CABLE
CONNECTION NOT USED
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX
SYNC 1 SYNC 1
GREY COAX
PLF FILTER
2 L
NAVSYS I/P 2-CORE MAINS
6 CABLE A SHIPS MAINS N
INTERFACE RTN POWER CABLE
E
PLU
1 3PLV
PHASE 1 2
PHASE 2 1
3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 2
4 DIAGNOSTIC
REF 1 PORT 3
5
REF 2 4
6
PULSE 7 CONTROL PCB
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A 3PLX
0V
1 CAN H
2 CAN L
3 GROUND
CANBUS OPTIONS
POWER UNIT 4 CAN H
5 CAN L
6 GROUND
INPUT FILTER CABLE K SHIP'S MAINS
(TB1) 110/220V CONTROL PCB
CD-3914
CONTROL PCB
PLV PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1
1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) 3 3
4 V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 1
6 O 6 6
7 B R/B
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 2
8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 8
9 R/Bk POWER UNIT
9 9
10 Bn/Bk 10 10
11 W 11 11
12 Bk 12 12
SKP
VIDEO SK8(10) SK7(9) 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX WHITE COAX
SKO
SYNC SK2(5) SK1(4) 1 SYNC 1
GREY COAX GREY COAX
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
6 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN L N L N
FILTER
PLU
1 2-CORE MAINS L
PHASE 1 2 POWER CABLE N
PHASE 2 3 E
CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 6
PULSE 7
LOG SHORT 8 CABLE A
0V
NOTE:
THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 12
FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR LOW SPEED ANTENNAS OR IN CONJUNCTION
WITH FIGURE 13 FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS.
POWER UNIT
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CTX-A8
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX
VIDEO VIDEO 1
SKO
GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 1
NOTE 1:
SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE POWER UNIT
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY 2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2
FILTER
2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
NOTE: E
THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION
WITH FIGURE 9f FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR LOW
SPEED ANTENNAS OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 10f FOR THE
COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS.
CD-4557
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE (CABLE R)
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
NNR-A55 CTX-A8
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1
OUT IN
SKO
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18
SYNC SYNC 1
OUT IN
4f.28
6
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB
7
GREEN 8 8
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH
PLW
+24V 1 POWER UNIT
(MOTOR) 2
2PLB
12 1
2 ON/OFF
Amdt. 5
KH 2020
Chap 4f
INTRODUCTION
61 Where the distance between the transceiver and the
display is greater than 65 metres up to a maximum of
180 metres, low loss co-axial cables must be used as
specified below.
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
CHAPTER 5
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING
WARNING
IF THE DISPLAY IS SWITCHED OFF, ENSURE
THAT NO PERSONNEL ARE IN THE VICINITY OF
T H E A ER I A L W H EN S W IT C H I N G T H E
EQUIPMENT ON.
NOTE: WARNING
For ARPA displays GO TO TEST is replaced with GO
TO SIM. T H E D IS P LA Y A N D P R OC E S SO R U N I T
CONTAIN HIGH VOLTAGES, CARE MUST BE
TAKEN WHEN MAKING SW1.
NOTE:
The skew can be set at +180/-179 degrees, to allow the CD-4790
gearbox to be mounted at any angle. The heading-line is
corrected within the software.
(1) Select A or B display by placing the cursor,
8 To Mute the transmitter, between selected angles: using the trackerball, on letter A(B) and then
(1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the pressing any pushbutton.
MUTE box. The pop-down boxes read; ON, ON, NOTE:
No Sec (Sec).
Other display is to be installed with the other letter B(A) on
NOTE: its installation.
Sec (S) does not allow selection of the MUTE facility when
in RUN mode. No Sec allows MUTE to be switched
ON/OFF while in RUN mode.
CD-4658
CD-4791
CD-4795
CD-4796
CD-5050
CD-5044
CD-5043
CD-4798
Display Configuration
28 To select the Type Approval Authority:
(1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
APPROVAL box, the box is now highlighted and CD-4799
the pop-down boxes contain the options;
EU (European Union) or NO (No Type (3) Press the appropriate pushbutton as required.
Approval).
NOTE:
When EXTERNAL is selected, the Gyro is connected to a
Low Ratio input from the Synchro Compass PCB.
When SERIAL HDT is selected, the Gyro is able to receive
serial HDT messages directly.
38 On completion of the Installation Set-up select EXIT, Set to optimise sea clutter control.
this returns the screen to the MENU functions.
NOTE: Set for tune bar length to be
60-70% of maximum when on tune.
The Installation Menu can not be exited until SW1 is set to
Sets the exact position of the
OFF. Mute Sector, allows adjustment
by 10 deg. in each direction.
TEST CARDS 1 & 2
39 Used to check screen linearity and colour alignment. Set to correct alignment of Radar
Primarily used for a Service Aid. and Graphics
CD-4801
41 Implement a full operational check using the controls (2) To return to the previously set level press the
as described in Chapter 1. If any faults are detected, right-hand pushbutton.
refer to Chapter 6 for Fault Diagnosis. (3) To save the new settings, set switch SW1 to the
OFF position and return to the Standby Screen.
NOTE:
The Mute Sector Skew facility applies only to the
Transmitter displayed in the GO TO TEST menu (i.e. the
transmitter currently selected in Standby mode). Where the
system comprises multi-transmitters and Mute Sector is
active, the Mute Sector Skew is to be applied to each
selected Transmitter individually.
NOTE:
The Alarm Outputs available at PLE on the Input/Output
PCB are as follows:
CD-4804
CURVED EBL SETUP 59 From the choice in the RADIUS TURN CURVED EBL /
RATE OF TURN CURVED EBL box ensure that the
52 The Curved EBL (EBL 2) is an Electronic Bearing Line legend reads RADIUS TURN CURVED EBL.
that graphically displays the rate of turn or radius of
turn that the vessel will take to effect a new course. The turn
shown will include the ships forwarding distance.
53 Before the Curved EBL can function correctly some
turn performance figures must be available to the
autopilot. The setting-up procedure makes provision for two
types of autopilot (1) Radius Turn (2) Rate of Turn.
54 The setting-up screen shows a graph of Forwarding
Distance versus Fractions of the Maximum Speed of
the vessel.
CD-4808
CD-4806
NOTES:
(1) Ensure that switch SW1 on the System PCB is switched
ON before any changes.
(2) Switch SW1 to OFF, on the System PCB, or switch SW1
CD-4809 off, before leaving Menu.
SERIAL MESSAGE SET UP SCREEN (2) Type Checking (i.e. Strict, or Relaxed)
This enables the listed NMEA serial messages
68 Allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Four to validated to be fully compliant with the Strict
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports. NMEA standard or alternatively to allow a
Relaxed message checking to compensate for
69 Each of the following input message types can be an external sensor that may not supply a
received on one or more of the 4 serial input comms correctly formatted message; this allows
ports: non-conforming equipment to be interfaced with
the Nucleus display. (Refer to Chapter 8,
DPT, GGA, GLL, HDT, RNN, RTE, VBW, VHW, VTG, WPL, Annex A for details of the NMEA
ZDA, ZZU. Communications Specification).
NOTES: NOTE:
(1) To adjust the settings for the Serial NMEA Input Relaxed message checking cannot compensate for all
messages, the Installation must first be "unlocked". This is deviations from the NMEA Standard.
achieved by setting switch SW1, on the System PCB, to the
ON position.
(3) Timeout
(2) Switch OFF switch SW1, on the System PCB, ,before This is the time period allowed before the failure
leaving the Menu. (non-appearance) of a message is detected.
Infrequent messages may require a longer
timeout period.
If an alternative priority Port has been configured
for the message, then that port will be used in
place of the timed out port. (See (1) for
information on port priorities).
CD-5123
KEY:
OPEN = No Link Fitted
MAKE = Link Fitted
A = Fit Link towards A end
B = Fit Link towards B end.
NOTE
Refer to Table 2 for GYRO settings.
1 OPEN Main Processor Link - Forces into CRT when Made, Must be used for 6000
2 OPEN Main Processor Link - Prints out Azimuth & Heading Line diagrams, out of Port 3, when
made.
3 MAKE Main CAN terminator on (M)
4 OPEN Heading Line, Shorting contacts (M), Pulse (O)
5 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert HVSync (not implemented, so should be reserved)
6 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert Vsync (not implemented, so should be reserved)
7 MAKE Processor Clock
8 OPEN Main Processor Link - (M) = Enable diagnostics from I/O processor
9 MAKE ATA CAN terminator on (M)
10 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert Hsync (not implemented, so should be resrved)
11 OPEN Scan Converter free run (M)
12 OPEN I/O Processor Link - enable diagnostics to I/O processor
13 OPEN Display Video Level = 0.7V (O) 1.0V (M) (removed issue E artwork)
14 OPEN Open, blanks muted sector - Made displays video during muted sector.
15 OPEN I/O Processor Link - iMade sets all serial messages to "super" relaxed
16 OPEN I/O Processor Link - Clears removable Flash memory
17 B Diagnostics on Com3 (B), ATA download (A)
18 B LOG Pulse (A), Shorting Contacts (B)
19 A Compass Phase 2+ Step/Synchro
20 A Compass Phase 2- Step
21 A Compass Phase 1+ Step/Synchro
22 A Compass Phase 1- Step
23 B Compass Stepper (B) Synchro (A)
24 B Compass Stepper (B) Synchro (A)
25 A Compass Phase 3+ Step/Synchro
26 A Compass Phase 3- Step
27 A Download (A), PS2 input (B)
28 A Hsync O/P (A) Compsync O/P (B)
29 MAKE Made to enable serial 3 input. Open for ATA Diagnostics Link
30 OPEN I/O Processor Link. Made outputs all serial messages
31 MAKE Download (M), PS2 input (O)
KEY
OPEN = No Link Fitted
MAKE = Link Fitted
A = Fit Link towards A end
B = Fit Link towards B end.
NOTE
Refer to Table 2 for GYRO settings.
TP62
350211-1
TP60
PL3
SK16
TP10
DS9094F
TP37
TP39 TP68
1 M20-9821006 SK6
TP40
PL1
M20-9731006
TP38 LK7
1
TP46 PL5
22-27-2121 1
LK10 TP45
LK6 TP61 87123-0601
LK5
LK8 A LK17 B
A LK27 B SW1
LK1
LK2
LK31 T101MH9ABE
PL11
LK30
LK12
LK16
LK15
M20-9820606
LK3
622-5024ES
SK1
TP63
TP59
TP65
TP66
TP48
22-27-2161
LK29
LK32
LK33
PL8
LK9 TP64
TP15
TP26
1
TP67
TP14
LK11
M20-9822006
PL4
TP21
LK14
TP22 A LK19 B
TP49
TP23 A LK20 B
TP42
LK4
A LK21 B
A LK24 B
TP58 A LK22 B
A LK25 B A LK18 B
SK14
A LK26 B
TP27
TP36
TP30
TP54
A LK23 B
1
TP13
TP12 TP41 TP2 TP3 TP11
1
PL9
A LK28 B TP43
SK13 M20-9821006
TP6 TP4
TP69
RV1
TP5
22-27-2161
TP19
1
HDE15SOLT
TP20
SK15
1
PL7 22-27-2141
PLV
PLX
SL8-CL-V PLU 350211-1
SL8-CL-V
PLD
PLW
1-380999-0
LK1
SL14-CL-V
LK3
LK2
PLB
SL4-CL-V
PLT
39-26-3080
SL12-CL-V
TP2
SL6-CL-V
L1366 L1366
PLG SL14-CL-V
PLJ
SL4-CL-V
TP3
1
PLH
PLF SL14-CL-V
SL14-CL-V PLG
PLH
SL4-CL-V
SKO SKP
SL4-CL-V PLB SL10-CL-V PLE SL8-CL-V PLC
L1366 L1366
TP3
LK2
LK3 PLA
622-5024ES
TP1
LK1 TP2
SL12-CL-V PLX
A E
Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression 5-6 Electrical Connection 4 - 17
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 4-5
C
Electrical Connections 4 - 11
CABLE CODES 4-9
Elliptical Waveguide 4-9
Cable Colour Abbreviations 4 - 10
Elliptical Waveguide Assembly 4 - 11
Cable Connections 4-1
Equipment Location 4-2
Cable Gland Assembly 4 - 14,4 - 20
Cable Specifications 4 - 11,4 - 32,4 - 17 F
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 - 9,4 - 17 Factory settings 5-6
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 - 29 Fitting 4-3
Checking the Display Operation 5-5 Fitting the Soft Start Unit 4-3
Checks After Fitting 4 - 13,4 - 16,4 - 23
G
CHECKS AFTER FITTING 4-5
GO TO DEFAULT box 5-6
Co-axial Cables 4 - 13
GO TO MENUS box 5-6
Compass Safe Distances 4-1
GO TO TEST 5-5
Connections Diagrams 4-1
GYRO FAILURE 5-5
Cover Removal 4 - 19
Gyro failure warning 5-5
Cursor Parking 5-6
Gyro Ratio 5-4
Cursor Parking High 5-6
Gyro Type 5-4
Cursor Parking Low 5-6
D I
Initial settings 5-6
Deck Gland Fitting 4 - 14,4 - 15
Installation 4 - 2,4 - 3
Default Settings 5-6
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS 4-1
Desk Top Display 4-1
installation information 4-2
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING 5-1
Installation parameters: 5-1
Downmast Transceiver 4 - 13,4 - 19
installation settings, 5-1
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) 4 - 2,4 - 9
Installation Set-up 5-5
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8): Installation
Dimensions 4 - 10
L
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) 4-2
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9) 4 - 11 Log Type 5-4
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Index (Chap 4 & 5)
M S
Main Bang Suppression (MBS) 5-6 Safety Notes 4-1
MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 4-8 SAFETY NOTES 4 - 1,4 - 2
Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4 - 11,4 - 16 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS 5-6
mains supply 5-1 Saving the Settings 5-6
Map Positioning 5-6 Serial Input Message Communications Ports 5 - 10
Mark VI Transmitter/Receiver 4-1 Serial Message Set Up 5 - 10
Maximum Recommended Waveguide Lengths 4-1 Ships Cables 4-1
Maximum Recommended Waveguide Lengths 4-1 Skew 5-2
Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) 4 - 13 Slave/Master Selection 5-2
Mk IV Transmitter /Receivers 4-1 Small Multi-Core Cables 4 - 12,4 - 18
Mk V Transmitter/Receivers 4-1 SMALL MULTI-CORE CABLES 4 - 10
Mk VI Transceiver Downmast (S-Band) Soft Start Unit 4 - 13,4 - 1,4 - 2,4 - 19
Interswitched 4 - 21
Split Display 4-1
MkVII Downmast S-Band Transceiver 4-1
Standby screen 5-1
MkVII Downmast X-Band Transceivers 4-1
MONITOR ARM 4-5 T
Motor Connections 4 - 24 Target Data Output Type 5-6
MUTE box 5-2 Test Cards 5-5
MUTE facility 5-2 Thermal Overload Trip Unit 4-2
TRANSCEIVER MKV 4-1
N
Transceiver (CTX-A8) to High Speed Antenna
NMEA serial messages 5 - 10 (CAE-A30-5) Connections 4 - 24
Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via DIU) System Transceiver (CTX-A8) to Low Speed Antenna
Connection 4 - 26 (CAE-A30-6) Connections 4 - 23
Nucleus 3 Interswitched System Connection 4 - 27 Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism
Connections 4 - 25
Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection 4 - 29,4 - 27
Transceiver and Turning Mechanisms 4-1
Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via RIU) CANbus
System Connection 4 - 28 Transceiver Wiring 4 - 13
Nucleus 3 Interswitched CANbus System Transmission Performance Monitor 5-2
Configuration 4 - 30
Transmitter Type 5-2
O Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6) 4-3
Optional Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers 4 - 27 Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6)) 4-2
Optional Mains Isolator 4 - 2,4 - 13,4 - 19 Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation
Dimensions 4-9
Optional Tx Monitor Arm 4-8
Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and
Cableform Routing 4 - 21,4 - 20
P
Turning Unit Fixing Centres and Outline Dimensions 4 - 4
PCB Locations And Cableform Routing 4 - 13,4 - 19 Turning Unit Mast Mounting 4-5
Pedestal Display 4-1 Tx Monitor Arm cableform 4-8
Power Cables 4 - 11,4 - 13,4 - 19,4 - 18 Type Approval Authority 5-4
Power ON/OF 5-1 Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnection 4 - 25
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 4-1 Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnections 4 - 26
R
RESET GYRO 5-5
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Index (Chap 4 & 5)
U W
Upmast Turning Mechanism 4 - 13,4 - 19 Watch Monitor
Timeout 5 - 6
Upmast Turning Mechanism 4-7 Watch Monitor 5-6
Upmast Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) 4-1 Watch Monitor Timeout 5-6
Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting 4 - 10 Waveguide Installation 4 - 3,4 - 9
UPMAST X-BAND TRANSCEIVER CAE-A12-20 4-2 Waypoint Positioning 5-6
USE FACTORY SETTINGS 5-6 WIRING DIAGRAMS 4 - 23
Sep 01 iv Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents
Table of Contents
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6.1
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) 6.3
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Chap 6
CHAPTER 6
WARNING
IF RADAR EQUIPMENT IS TO BE WORKED ON, WHILE POWERED UP, IN PORT, ENSURE THAT:
No one is working close to the scanner, i.e. No one is within a few metres of the Antenna.
The Antenna is rotating, or if the work requires the Antenna to be stationary that it is directed
towards unoccupied areas, e.g. out to sea.
No one looks directly into the emission side of a slotted waveguide (open box type) Antenna.
The risk of being hit by a rotating Antenna is not overlooked if work close to the Antenna is
necessary.
Any work required on such equipment must be implemented by competent persons, operating a
safe system of work, so that no one is put at risk.
DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION 5 Fault conditions detected by the system are
highlighted by System Alarms which appear on the
display. These are:
1 This Chapter is divided into three parts:
(1) No Video.
(1) Preventive Maintenance.
(2) No Sync.
(2) Diagnostic Maintenance.
(3) No Azimuth.
(3) Corrective Maintenance.
(4) No Heading Line.
2 T he following paragraphs out line the basic
maintenance and fault finding procedures which can (5) No Gyro.
be implemented by the operator. The fault finding/repair
philosophy is limited to checking cable connections and
changing fuses. 6 A series of simple algorithms (Figures 5 to 11) form a
brief, step-by-step outline to guide the operator
NOTE: through the fault finding procedure.
For details of the Maintenance procedures applicable to
the associated Transmitter/Receivers, refer to the
appropriate part of Chapter 7.
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE
EQUIP MENT. ALL MAIN TENANCE IS TO BE
IMPLEMENTED WITH POWER SWITCHED OFF.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3 Preventive maintenance consists of keeping the
system clean, particularly the console, cabinets, and
filters. External surfaces should be cleaned with a soft,
non-abrasive cloth, moistened in a soap solution.
4 Screens are to be checked and cleaned regularly with
a soap solution.
8 There are 3 fuses in the Nucleus Display System: (3) Cotton Buds.
RADAR CIRCLE
RADAR CIRCLE
NUCLEUS 3 5000
KELVIN HUGHES PUSHBUTTONS
6000
NUCLEUS 3
DEGAUSS
PUSHBUTTONS
O
O
I
I
ON/OFF
TRACKERBALL
CD-4698
CD-4699 ON/OFF DEGAUSS TRACKERBALL
Figure 1 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) Figure 3 - Screen Control Unit (6000 Series)
A = ACCESS PLATE
CD-0087 CD-2366
Figure 2 - Access Plate Removal (5000 Series) Figure 4 - Access Plate Removal (6000 Series)
NO RADAR INFORMATION
& NO WARNINGS
NO
IS VIDEO SEEN? SUSPECT DISPLAY FAULT
YES
SUSPECT Rx
OR RF HEAD FAULT
CD-2367
ARE PLUGS
IS THE FAULT NO PLU & PLA ON THE NO
RECTIFY
CLEARED? INPUT/OUTPUT PCB
SECURE?
YES YES
OPERATOR WARNING
NO VIDEO/NO SYNC
ARE THE
NO ADJUST LEVELS
TEST MENU LEVELS
SET CORRECTLY? ACCORDINGLY
YES
AT
DISPLAY CAN CARRY OUT A
IS THE SYSTEM NO TUNE INDICATION BE NO
PERFORMANCE
INTERSWITCHED? ADJUSTED FOR PEAK MONITOR CHECK
INDICATION?
YES YES
YES YES
YES
DISPLAY
YES
RETURN TO
NORMAL OPERATION
CD-2369
OPERATOR WARNING
NO AZIMUTH/
NO HEADING LINE
NO YES
ESTABLISH WHICH
UNIT IS FAULTY BY
INTERSWITCHING
Tx/Rx
DISPLAY OR Tx/Rx?
DISPLAY
CAN THE
YES TUNE INDICATION YES CHECK THAT THE
IS THE ANTENNA INSTALLATION MENU
BE ADJUSTED FOR PEAK
ROTATING? IS SET CORRECTLY
INDICATION?
NO NO
YES
IS THE
S-BAND FAULT CLEARED YES
S-BAND Or X-BAND? BY RESETTING Tx
CURRENT TRIP?
X-BAND? NO
IS THE FAULT NO
REFER TO
CLEARED? KELVIN HUGHES ENGINEER
YES
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION
CD-2370
NO INFORMATION
ON SCREEN
REMOVE COVER
FROM MONITOR
*SK1 - WIRE 15
SK2 - WIRE 16
CHECK THAT THE VIDEO SK3 - WIRE 12
CABLE IS CONNECTED AT SK4 - WIRE 17
PL9 (SYSTEM PCB) & SK1 TO SK5 - WIRE 18
* **
SK5 (VIDEO PCB ) & PL3
**FOR LATER VERSIONS THE VIDEO PCB
IS INTEGREATED WITH THE DEFLECTION PCB
DOES
THE BACKGROUND NO NO
BRILLIANCE OF THE IS THE PSU FAN
RUNNING? SUSPECT THE PSU
SCREEN INCREASE
?
YES YES
YES
NO SUSPECT
IS THE FAULT CLEARED?
THE MONITOR KIT
YES
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION
CD-2373
NO INFORMATION
ON SCREEN
DOES
THE BACKGROUND YES
BRILLIANCE OF THE SUSPECT THE SYSTEM PCB
SCREEN INCREASE
?
NO
IS THE YES
PSU FAN RUNNING? MONITOR FAULT
NO
YES NO
YES YES
INCORRECT SWITCHING
YES
ARE
LEDs D9, D10,
LEAVE IN THIS CONDITION & IS THE NO D11 & D12 LIT WHEN NO SUSPECT DIU
CONTACT A KELVIN HUGHES FAULT CLEARED? EITHER DISPLAY IS POWER SUPPLY FAULT
ENGINEER SWITCHED ON?
YES YES
VIDEO/DEFLECTION BOARD
SYSTEM & ARPA BOARD
INPUT BOARD
CD-4837
ON/OFF SWITCH
SYSTEM PCB
ARPA PCB
INPUT PCB
INPUT FILTER
3 PHASE
TRANSFORMER
(OPTIONAL)
(NNR-A322)
PROCESSOR POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
CD-4664
MONITOR CRT
TRACKERBALL PCB
PUSHBUTTON PCB
CD-4665
T
F
Trackerball 6-2
Fault conditions 6-1
fault finding 6-1
Fuses 6-2
I
Incorrect Interswitching 6 - 10
L
LETHAL VOLTAGES 6-1
M
MAINTENANCE 6-1
MAINTENANCE & DIAGNOSTICS 6-1
Monitor Assembly PCB Locations 6 - 14
N
No Azimuth 6-1
No Gyro 6-1
No Heading Line 6-1
No Information on Screen (5000 Series) 6-8
No Information on Screen (6000 Series) 6-9
No Radar Information 6-4
No Sync 6-1
No Video 6-1
No Video/No Sync 6-6
O
Operator Warning (No Video/No Sync) 6-6
Operator Warning (No Azimuth/No Heading Line) 6-7
Operator Warning -No Gyro 6-5
P
PCB locations 6-2
PCB Locations (5000 Series) 6 - 11
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 7a
MkIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
INTRODUCTION 7a.1
MODULATOR 7a.1
LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 7a.3
RF HEAD (NJRC Type) 7a.4
POWER SUPPLIES 7a.4
RECEIVER MONITOR 7a.5
TRANSMISSION MONITOR 7a.5
SPECIFICATION 7a.5
DIAGNOSTICS 7a.5
Prerequisites 7a.5
Failure Messages 7a.5
Test Equipment 7a.5
Fuses 7a.6
Indicators 7a.6
MAINTENANCE 7a.11
CHAPTER 7b
MkV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
Introduction 7b.1
Specification 7b.3
Diagnostics 7b.3
Pre-requisites 7b.3
Failure Messages 7b.3
Test Equipment 7b.3
Test Points 7b.4
Maintenance 7b.8
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
CHAPTER 7c
MkVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
INTRODUCTION 7c.1
Transceiver 7c.3
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 7c.8
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14 (/2) 7c.9
SPECIFICATION 7c.10
DIAGNOSTICS 7c.10
Pre-Requisites 7c.10
Failure Messages 7c.10
Test Equipment 7c.11
Indicators 7c.11
CHAPTER 7d
MkVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (S-BAND)
Page
Introduction 7d.1
System DESCRIPTION 7d.1
Functional Description 7d.3
SPECIFICATION 7d.5
Diagnostics 7d.6
PRE-REQUISITES 7d.6
FAILURE MESSAGES 7d.6
MAINTENANCE 7d.25
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
CHAPTER 7e
MkVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (X-BAND)
Page
Introduction 7e.1
Specification 7e.5
Transmitter 7e.5
Receiver 7e.5
Diagnostics 7e.6
Pre-requisites 7e.6
Failure Messages 7e.6
Test Equipment 7e.6
Preparation for Fault Diagnosis 7e.7
Indicators, Test Points, Links and Switches (Figures 7e, 8e & 9e) 7e.12
Maintenance 7e.18
CHAPTER 8a
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR SYSTEMS
Page
INTERFACING FOR THE LOW RATIO COMPASS & MASTER/SLAVE INSTALLATIONS 8a.4
Introduction 8a.4
Functional Description 8a.7
Pre-fitting Checks 8a.7
Installation Of Interfaces 8a.7
Connections Required For Nucleus 6000 Series 8a.11
Connections Required for Nucleus split 6000a Series 8a.11
External Connections To Interfaces 8a.12
NUCLEUS INTERFACING INSTRUCTIONS 8a.13
Nucleus Display Settings - Commissioning 8a.15
FUNCTION OF LINKS 8a.18
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 8a.19
CHAPTER 8a
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR SYSTEMS Cont.
Page
CHAPTER 8a - ANNEX A
Page
CHAPTER 8b
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
Page
INSTALLATION 8b.1
Introduction 8b.1
Pre-Installation Requirements 8b.1
Installation Instructions 8b.1
Commissioning 8b.2
Introduction 8b.2
Control Switches (Figure 2) 8b.2
Operation 8b.2
Link Settings on Installation 8b.2
Setting To Work 8b.3
Checks After Set Up 8b.3
Sep 01 iv Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
CHAPTER 8b
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Cont.
Page
General 8b.4
Controls and Indicators 8b.4
Dual Interswitch PCB 8b.4
Operation 8b.5
PARTS 8b.8
CHAPTER 8c
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
Page
Introduction 8c.1
INSTALLATION 8c.2
General 8c.3
Setting-up the Monitor 8c.3
Setting-up the Remote Trackerball 8c.3
Operating 8c.15
Power On/Off 8c.15
Controls and Indicators 8c.15
Power On/Off 8c.19
Amdt. 1 v Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
CHAPTER 8d
TRANSMITTER INTERFACE UNIT
Page
Introduction 8d.1
Installation 8d.1
Commissioning 8d.7
Indicators 8d.7
Link & Switch Settings 8d.7
CANBus Data Format 8d.7
Operation 8d.13
PARTS 8d.14
CHAPTER 8e
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
Page
Introduction 8e.1
Installation 8e.1
Commissioning 8e.4
Indicators 8e.4
Link & Switch Settings 8e.4
ECDIS Output Configuration 8e.14
Operation 8e.16
PARTS 8e.17
Sep 01 vi Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
CHAPTER 8f ERGOPOD
Page
Introduction 8f.1
Installation 8f.1
Operation 8f.8
controls 8f.8
Shared Display Operation 8f.8
ILLUSTRATIONS
CHAPTER 7a
MkIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 7b
MkV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
Figure 8b - Turning Mechanism: Showing Location of Brushless Motor PCB (CAE-A30-8 only) 7b.8
CHAPTER 7b
MkV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
Figure 15b - Receiver PCB and Low Noise Front Assembly 7b.13
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 7c
MkVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Page
Figure 15c - Control PCB: Links, Switches, Potentiometers and Test Points 7c.18
Figure 17c - Rx Monitor PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test Points 7c.20
Figure 18c - Power Supply PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test points 7c.21
Amdt. 1 ix Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 7d
MkVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (S-BAND)
Page
Figure 5d - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7d.14
Figure 6d - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7d.15
Figure 7d - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations 7d.16
CHAPTER 7e
MkVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (X-BAND)
Page
Figure 7e - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7e.15
Figure 8e - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7e.16
Figure 9e - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations 7e.17
Sep 01 x Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 8a
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS
Page
CHAPTER 8a - ANNEX A
Page
CHAPTER 8b
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
Page
Figure 3b - STANDBY Screen - Mimic Diagram (Nucleus 5000 & 6000) 8b.6
Figure 5b - Dual Interswitch Unit PCB - Links, Potentiometers & Switch Positions 8b.8
Amdt. 1 xi Sep 01
KH 2020
Contents (Chap 7 & 8)
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 8c
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
Page
Figure 1c - Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Installation Diagram 8c.5
Figure 2c - Nucleus 7000 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Installation Diagram 8c.7
Figure 5c - Flat Panel Display ON/OFF Sounder (NNR-A65): Installation Diagram 8c.11
CHAPTER 8d
TRANSMITTER INTERFACE UNIT
Page
Figure 3d - CAN Adapter PCB (NNR-A981): Link and Switch Positions 8d.7
Figure 6d - Display to RIU via TIU to MkV Transmitter: Typical System Configuration 8d.11
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 8e
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
Page
Figure 3e - Display to RIU to MkVII S-Band Transmitter: Typical System Configuration 8e.7
CHAPTER 8f
ERGOPOD
Page
CHAPTER 7A
MKIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
Mk IV X-BAND
UPMAST TRANSCEIVERS
ANTENNA (see Table)
KELVIN HUGHES
25kW UPMAST
TRANSCEIVER
(CAE - A12-20)
CABLE CODE N
CABLE CODE K
ANTENNA OPTIONS
1.8m ANTENNA (CAE-A13/2)
2.4m ANTENNA (CAE-A14)
CABLE CODES
CABLE E - 12 CORE
CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER
CABLE N - 38 CORE COMPOSITE
CD-4671
MUTE
CSR2 TRIGGER
Tx DISABLE MOD TRIG. CHARGE TRIGGER
AZIMUTH IC10B OUTPUT SHUT-DOWN CIRCUIT
AZIMUTH
DETECT TR21 2
& IC16A
HT & TRIG.
CHARGING SHUT-DOWN
DELAY IC16 IC10A, IC11
& IC1C
S4
RUN/STANDBY AERIAL RELAY
AERIAL RELAY RLB
DRIVER TR2
& RLN
INPUT CHANGE
DETECT 2
INSTALLATION
IC2, IC28 SYNC ADJUST SYNC 1
PRF SWITCHES SYNC AMP X3 SYNC 2
IC4 & IC5 RV1 TR10, TR11 SYNC 3
IC7B, TR7, 9 & TR12
LK3
PRF PRE-PULSE
LATCH PRF GENERATOR EXT. SYNC PCB
PULSE LENGTH
MEDIUM PULSE
LONG PULSE DETECT 1, 5, OR 3
X
TIMER FAST/SLOW
IC1, IC3 & IC13 LATCH PFN PFN RELAY (X OR S) Tx Tx READY
HOLD-ON DETECTOR
RELAYS IC4 DRIVERS MINUTE TIMER READY
CIRCUIT IC17 & IC11
CD-2182
IC9
OPTION
VOLTAGE
-330V REGULATOR -150V Tx MON
D73, R145 CTX-A199
R144
+27V
RFI FILTER
MP VOLTS
SP VOLTS
POWER BRIDGE RECTIFIER HOLD-OFF PFN RELAYS
CHARGE SCR CSR1 REACTOR SL1 & TAILBITER
POWER TRANSFORMER T1 SMOOTHING CHOKE L4
CHOKE L4
SWITCHES 20V IN CAPACITORS C63, C64,
BLOCKING DIODE D53
400V OUT VOLTAGE SENSE
CURRENT LIMIT
VOLTAGE SENSE
CHARGE MAGNETRON
STANDBY SHUTDOWN DELAY
CHARGING DELAY AND
TRIGGER
IC8B, TR27 DISCHARGE MAIN SCR PULSE
1
T5 CSR2 TRANSFORMER T3
OVERSWING
MODULATOR TRIGGER DIODES & PEN OVERSWING
COMPENSATING RESISTOR
DIODES R125
HEATER
RFI FILTER VOLTS
CD-2183
+14V -14V
+14V
-14V
0V
3 x VIDEO
I/P AMP & SELECTABLE OUTPUT
5 STAGE 3 STAGE DETECTOR LOWPASS IC2
I/F BANDPASS BANDPASS VIDEO
LOG AMP LOG AMP TR33/TR37 FILTER VIDEO AMP
FILTER TR34 FILTER
I/F SCR. VID.SCR.
BAND SELECT
IC6
IC5
SAMPLE IC3 AMP IC3 SUM LNFE TUNE
DISCRIMINATOR
& HOLD
MOD SYNC.
TUNE
IC4
TUNE INDICATOR
TUNE AMP
CD-2184
RF OUTPUT PORT
LIMITER
PLB SKB
1 1 MOTOR CURRENT LIM. +VE
MOTOR CURRENT LIM. +VE
2 2
FLYING
3 3 MOTOR 0V LEAD
4 4 MOTOR 0V
CD-1004
NOTES:
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 2400 - 3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz).
(2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base.
(3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base.
FUSES INDICATORS
30 References and ratings for the fuses fitted in the PSU 31 Indicators are provided on some PCBs to signify the
are shown in Table 3. conditions outlined in Table 4.
FAILURE MESSAGE
IS THE
ARE
TRANSCEIVER NO
NO CHECK SETTINGS OF LINK & SWITCH SET TO CORRECT
OPERATIVE
LINKS & SWITCHES SETTINGS CORRECT? POSITION
(AUDIBLE ON LP)?
YES YES
SUSPECT PSU
SYNC OUTPUT IS THERE CHECK TRANSCEIVER
NO NO
IS PICTURE ON CONNECTION PROBLEM POWER TO MODULATOR POWER SUPPLY,
DISPLAY? CHECK WIRING IN PCB (LED D67 ON)? MAINS IN NEON ON,
TRANSCEIVER & TO DISPLAY FUSES, OUTPUTS,
YES YES
YES
YES
YES
IS +12V ON RUN NO
PRE-REQUISITES FAULTY WIRING
INPUT TO MODULATOR?
FROM DISPLAY
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS YES
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN
IS MUTE ACTIVE NO
(+12V ON MUTE INPUT)? REMOVE MUTE' CONDITION
YES
FAULT ON MODULATOR
CD-2195
FAILURE MESSAGE
IS
DISPLAY TUNE NO
BAR WORKING AS TUNE CHECK CABLING
IS ADJUSTED?
YES
NO IS NO
IS PICTURE ON AT DISPLAY SWITCH ON
CABLING FAULTY?
DISPLAY? "MON"
YES YES
GOOD
"Rx MON" SUN? RECEIVER
(SEE RADAR LOG OR RF HEAD FAULT
BOOK) (RECEIVE SECTION)
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
Tx WORKING CORRECTLY,
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS
DISPLAY WARNING CIRCUIT
CORRECTLY SET
FAULT
5. SET TO RUN CD-2196
FAILURE MESSAGE
IS THE
NO SET THE
IS THE ANTENNA NO ANTENNA SAFETY
ANTENNA SAFETY
ROTATING? SWITCH SET TO ON?
SWITCH TO ON
YES YES
IS THERE
NO POWER TO THE
ANTENNA TURNING
MOTOR?
YES
IS NO CHECK/REPLACE
MOTOR TURNING? MOTOR BRUSHES
OR REPLACE MOTOR
YES
NO
ARE THE
TRANSCEIVER CHECK MAINS INPUT
NO NO
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS IS PSU NEON ON? FROM DISPLAY OR
PRESENT & INTERSWITCH UNIT
CORRECT?
YES YES
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS SUSPECT DISPLAY PCB/HL PCB CHECK FUSES/SUSPECT
CORRECTLY SET IN THE TURNING MECHANISM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5. SET TO RUN
CD-2198
FAILURE MESSAGE
YES YES
IS THERE
NO POWER TO THE
ANTENNA TURNING
MOTOR?
YES
NO
ARE THE
TRANSCEIVER CHECK MAINS INPUT
NO IS PSU NEON ON? NO FROM DISPLAY OR
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS
PRESENT & INTERSWITCH UNIT
CORRECT?
YES YES
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS SUSPECT DISPLAY PCB/HL PCB CHECK FUSES/SUSPECT
CORRECTLY SET IN THE TURNING MECHANISM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5. SET TO RUN
CD-2199
CD-1256
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
37 Access to the majority of PCBs is gained by removing
WARNINGS the front panel (six screws) on a downmast unit, or by
removing both side panels (four self retaining bolts) on an
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE upmast unit. A length of cord attached between the upmast
EQUIPMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED unit side panels prevents them from falling.
WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS. THEREFORE
ONLY QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS ARE TO GAIN 38 Access to the H/L Azimuth PCB is via the rear panel of
the unit.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE
TRANSCEIVER. 39 The antenna can be prevented from rotating by sliding
SW4 (on the Modulator PCB) to OFF. The Upmast
BEFORE COMMENCING ANY REMOVAL gearbox/transceiver has a safety switch which can be set to
AND/OR REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OFF from outside the unit. (SW4 on the modulator can be
ENSURE THAT THE WARNINGS AND operated once the side covers are off.
CAUTIONS DETAILED AT THE FRONT OF THIS
MANUAL AND THOSE DETAILED IN TEXT ARE 40 Refer to Figure 12a for graphical aid.
STRICTLY ADHERED TO.
ISOLATE THE TRANSCEIVER BEFORE
REMOVING/REPLACING MODULES.
SET THE TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY
SWITCH TO OFF
SAFETY
SWITCH
CD-2194
CHAPTER 7B
MKV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
AZIMUTH GEARBOX
PCB BRUSHLESS
CAE-A402/3 MOTOR MOTOR PCB
CAE-A236
TO/FROM
DISPLAY TERMINALS VIDEO RF
VIDEO RECEIVER
OR PCB CTX-C356 HEAD MAGNETRON
INTERSWITCH
UNIT OR CTX-A368
IN LINE PSU
POWER
MODULATOR RF POWER
CTX-A332
CD-3711
INTERSWITCH BOX
SHIPS MAINS
FROM DISPLAY/
1 PHASE
CABLE K
TO DISPLAY/
CABLE E
DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH BOX
(IN LINE POWER SUPPLY)
CD-4673
12 Technical specifications for the MkV Transceivers are 13 The Algorithms detailed in Figures 5b to 7b provide an
provided in Table 1 below. aid to fault diagnosis in the transceiver. Entry to the
algorithms is via Failure Messages generated at the display.
Table 1 - MkV Transceiver Specification
PRE-REQUISITES
Frequency: X (I) -Band 941030MHz 14 Before any fault diagnosis and rectification is
implemented, the radar system must be in a standard
Peak Power output: X-Band 10kW nominal configuration, as detailed at the top of the appropriate fault
diagnosis algorithm.
Magnetron Life: 10,000 Hours typical
NOTES:
The PRF Oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 700Hz to 800Hz (nominally set to 750Hz). Dual
PRF version for high speed craft.
18 Test Points are located on the following PCBs: TP1 - TR1 Gate Trigger Pulses
(1) Transceiver Terminals PCB TP2 - High Voltage Supply
TP3 - TR5 Gate Drive Pulse
TP4 - MODSYNC Out
TP1 - Dummy Sync pulse astable output
TP5 - HV Current Monitor
TP2 - Gated Sync pulses
TP6 - HV Current Trip Reference Level
TP3 - Video Output
TP7 - Common for TP5
TP4 - Sync Output
TP9 - HV Current Trip Pulse
TP5 - Rx Sync from Modulator
TP10 - LV Current Trip Reference Level
TP6 - 0V signal
TP11 - Magnetron Heater Current Monitor
TP12 - LV Current Trip Fixed Reference Level
TP13 - LV Current Trip Shutdown Pulse
TP14 - HTLO Monitor Output
TP15 - Pulse Transformer Power Drive Pulses
TP1 TP16 - Tail Biter Pulse
TP17 - Main FET Drive Pulses
TP2
TP18 - Power Ground
TP19 - Low if 350V line is over 450V
TP20 - Low Voltage Supply, nominally +14V
PLA TP5
TP21 - Pulse Shaper Circuit Drive Pulses
B
LK1
PLK TP15
TP17
TP6
PLD
TP16
TP11 TP14
TP4
CD-3839
TP25
TP2
TP20 TP5
TP8
TP6 TP18
Figure 3b - Transceiver Terminals PCB: Test Point TP13 TP7
TP10
TP22 TP3
TP1
TP21
PLE TP24
PLA PLB
CD-3721
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN
FAILURE MESSAGE
"SYNC/VIDEO
MISSING"
ON DISPLAY
IS THERE
IS THE POWER TO THE
NO NO SUSPECT
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER & 40V
POWER SUPPLY FROM DISPLAY/40V
OPERATIVE?
THE DISPLAY? PSU FAULT
YES YES
IS THE
RECONNECT NO COAXIAL PLUG IS THE NO CHECK THAT
CABLE CONNECTED ON THE ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH
TERMINALS ROTATING? IS ON
PCB?
YES YES
YES YES
TRANSCEIVER
VIDEO/ FAULT
TERMINALS NO NOISE
PCB AT TP3 ON
TERMINALS
PCB?
YES
SUSPECT
DISPLAY
PCBs
CD-3744
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS
FAILURE MESSAGE
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN "NO AZIMUTH"
ON DISPLAY
NO IS THE
ANTENNA
ROTATING?
YES
YES
SUSPECT THE
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
MECHANISM
ARE THE
DISPLAY & 40V NO SUSPECT THE
PSU POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
OUTPUTS PRESENT
UNIT
AND CORRECT?
YES
SUSPECT DISPLAY
PCB's OR HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
CD-3745 MECHANISM
PRE-REQUISITES
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS
FAILURE MESSAGE
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN "NO HEADING LINE"
ON DISPLAY
NO IS THE
ANTENNA
ROTATING
YES
YES
IS THERE
REPLACE THE POWER TO THE IS POWER
MOTOR/BRUSHLESS YES ANTENNA TURNING
NO
YES
PRESENT AT
MOTOR PCB MOTOR/MOTOR PCB THE TERMINALS
OR STARTER ASSY OR STARTER PCB?
ASSY?
CHECK WIRING
CONNECTIONS
NOTE; FOR THE HIGH SPEED MOTOR NO
THIS IS THE SWITCHING WAVEFORM,
REFER TO CHAPTER 4 FOR DETAILS
SUSPECT THE
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
MECHANISM
ARE THE
DISPLAY POWER NO SUSPECT THE
SUPPLY OUTPUTS POWER SUPPLY
PRESENT AND UNIT
CORRECT?
YES
SUSPECT DISPLAY
PCB's OR HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
CD-3746 MECHANISM
SHIM
PL3
PL2
PL4
CD-3606
Figure 8b - Turning Mechanism: Showing Location of Brushless Motor PCB (CAE-A30-8 only)
ANTENNA MOTOR
TERMINAL BLOCK
TB2
CD-3737
29 The Transceiver contains the following PCBs and Table 3 - Optional PCBs and Modules
Modules:
PCB/Module Identity
TB2
CD-3835
FILTER
MOTOR
MOTOR STARTER
PCB
CD-3843
AZIMUTH PCB
RF HEAD HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
NOTE : MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY IS SECURED BY THE FIVE SCREWS AND PILLAR SHOWN
CD-1538
SMB CONNECTORS
RF HEAD HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
CD-3748
270 090
100
260
110 TARGET 1
250 BRG 039.3 (T)
RANGE 3.3 nm
COURSE 349 (T)
240 120 SPEED 2.7 kts
0.8 CPA 3.2 nm
VRM nm 130 TCPA 2.2 min
OFF 230
105.6
EBL deg 220 140 WAY Pt NAV
OFF
G R
210
150 PLOT MAPS
4 S
A A
E 9 9 200
I
N
5 A
I
N 190 180 170
160 TRIAL VDU
CD-2543
Transmitter Monitor
CHAPTER 7C
MKVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
PLA
AZ/HL PCB
LOC 9
PLA
RX
PLC
RF HEAD
PLA
NOISE MONITOR
RF HEAD DIODE
LOC. 5 LOC. 8
PLB
CIRCULATOR
LIMITER MIXER
PSU CAE-A202
L.N.F.E.
LOC. 2
PLC
PLA
LOC. 5
PLB
HEATSINK
1 TB
TP's
PLC
RECEIVER LOC. 1
PLB HEATSINK LOC. 7
PLB
LOC.5
POWER SUPPLY TUNE SUPPLY
PLK PLA HV MON SUPPLY BRAID PCB
LOC. 4 PART OF
PLC
PLD
HEATSINK CTX-A250
38 CORE CABLE
PLB
LOC. 6
TERMS
HEATSINK PLJ
CTX-A246
CONTROL CIRCUITS
PLC
Tx MON DETECTOR &
POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL
PLH
FAN
CD-3803
KELVIN HUGHES
30kW TRANSCEIVER/
TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE L
SOFT
START
UNIT
CZZ-A14
CABLE: CODE N
CABLE: CODE B
DISPLAY
CABLE: CODE L
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
MAINS MAINS
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
80-261-600 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN 1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODE L
CABLE CODES
TRANSCEIVER ANTENNA CABLE B - 3-CORE SMALL
25rpm CAE-A37 3.9m CAE-A36 CABLE L - 3-CORE POWER
40rpm CAE-A45 2.8m CAE-A39 CABLE N - 38-CORE
CD-1335
X
LK1
FS3
SWITCHING 0.3A
FILTER
HV ON/OFF REGULATOR -15V TO CONTROL BOARD
L5, C46
SW1 IC4, L3
CURRENT
SENSE
R26
CD-1377
SOFT START (INHIBIT TO CONTROL BOARD)
180
90
SEC
WARM-UP TIMER
LK10
180, 90, 3 SECONDS
IC24, 25, 26, 27
TX READY
RV4 TIMER SET
TO DISPLAY
POWER ON
RESET (SHEET 2)
3 SECOND
SELECT PSU INTERRUPT
SENSE
C44, IC28A, B
HV OFF TO
HEATER 1 HV OFF POWER UNIT
HTR I MON SENSE GATING
FROM MODULATOR IC3 IC7A, B, C
TO DUMMY
DUMMY
TRIG PULSE
SYNC GATE
HEADING LINE HEADING LINE GENERATOR
IC7C
FROM GEARBOX SENSE (SHEET 2)
IC21A & LK8 OVERRIDE MUTE OR GATE TO CHARGE
D25, D29, D39 SHUTDOWN
42Hz GATE
MUTE 1 FROM DISPLAY (SHEET 2)
Rx MON MUTE
+24 V TO SOFT
START UNIT
VIA Tx/Rx
FS1 SAFETY
AE MOTOR 0.3A SWITCH
CONTACTOR
SWITCH FROM SOFT
TR2 WITH LK1 START UNIT
SELECTED
+15V
LOCAL OSCILLATOR
REGULATOR
IC2 (ADJUSTABLE) R11 R10
SET VOLTAGE
CD-1378 RESISTORS
TX MONITOR BLOCK
SENSE
-150V FROM MODULATOR AC COUPLING COMPARATOR TX MON PULSE TO RECEIVER
RESISTOR
C72 IC13A
R121
STORAGE
CAPACITOR
C71
CHARGE
STATE LATCH ENABLE CHARGE CSR1 TR1G
SHUTDOWN
COMPARATOR GATING DELAY TIMER DRIVER CSR1 TRIG TO MODULATOR
GATE
IC8, 12 IC7, 10, 14 MUTE GATE IC5 TR8
IC9B, 11A
(SHEET 1)
42Hz 3KHz
PULSE LENGTH
PRF DIVIDER PRE-PULSE CSR2 TR1G
MP DECODE STATE LATCH PRF TRIG MONO CSR2 TRIG TO MODULATOR
IC17 LK4 DRIVER
LP CIRCUIT IC16 IC15
LK3, 5 PLG TR10
IC9, 11, 18, TP9
Rx MON Rx TRIG TO Rx
TRIG GATE MON TRIG TO Rx MONITOR
D40, 41
MAG HEATER
RELAY DRIVE HEATER RELAY
TO MODULATOR
RUN IC18, TR11
LK6
EXT TRIG. SYNC
JITTER
ENABLE
LK9, RV1
CD-1379
RELAY
RELAY RELAY
HEATER
COIL COIL
TURN DOWN
MP RELAY
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
LP RELAY
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
HEATER TURNDOWN.
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
DUMMY TRIGGER SYNC PULSE
SYNC PULSE TO DISPLAY
(FROM CONTROL OR GATE
BOARD) D4, D5
Rx TRIGGER
(TO CONTROL
BOARD)
PULSE FORMING
FROM CHARGE CHARGING BLOCKING HOLD OFF SYNC PULSE NETWORK AND
POWER UNIT CSR1 CHOKE DIODE REACTOR TRANSFORMER RELAYS
-350 V L5 D7 SL1 T1 L1, L2, L3, HEATER
C1 TO C6 TURNDOWN
DC HEATERS
RELAY &
FROM POWER UNIT
RESISTOR
RLC, R4
-150 V
(TO CONTROL TX MON
SUPPLY HEATER
BOARD) SHORT PULSE RFI
TAILBITER FILTER L4
SL2
MON -ve VOLTAGE HEATER
HV MONITOR
(TO CONTROL
MONITOR R5
BOARD)
HEATER I MONITOR
CHARGE
TRIGGER
TRANSFORMER OVERSWING
T3 NETWORK &
PULSE
TRANSFORMER COMPENSATING
CAPACITORS
CSR1 TRIGGER S1
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
DISCHARGE
CSR2 TRIGGER DISCHARGE
CSR2 &
(FROM CONTROL TR2
PRIMING MAGNETRON
BOARD) TRANSFORMER MAGNETRON LEADS
CIRCUIT
CD-3823
START/STOP
DATA LINES
SW1
Tx MUTE TO
CONTROL PCB
START/STOP
STOP START PULSE WEDGE
INHIBIT ENVELOPE
COMPARATOR STOP PULSE FLIP FLOP
TR3 FLIP FLOP
IC7, 8 IC2B
IC2A
+15V
AND GATE CURRENT
D5, 7, 10 SOURCE
Rx MON ON FROM TR1
CONTROL PCB
100 ms RAMP
OPTO COUPLER COMPARATOR DIFFERENTIATOR
Rx TRIG FROM MONOSTABLE
IC11 C12 IC9 C8, R18, IC10C
CONTROL PCB IC12A
CD-3848
24 Two versions are provided 31 An ON/OFF switch located by the cable entries on the
outside of the case provides safety isolation of the
(1) 25rpm antenna motor when the switch is set to the OFF position.
(2) 40rpm Power is provided from the motor, thus also disabling the
transmitter when the switch is set to OFF
25 The 25 rpm and 40 rpm versions are fitted with different
motors.
26 The basic unit contains the Antenna Motor, Gearbox,
RF Rotating Joint and Mount for the Antenna.
27 A slotted disc on the final drive provides 180 azimuth
pulses and a heading line pulse per revolution of the
antenna.
+14V -14V
+14V
-14V
0V
3 x VIDEO
I/P AMP & SELECTABLE OUTPUT
5 STAGE 3 STAGE DETECTOR LOWPASS IC2
I/F BANDPASS BANDPASS VIDEO
LOG AMP LOG AMP TR33/TR37 FILTER VIDEO AMP
FILTER TR34 FILTER
I/F SCR. VID.SCR.
BAND SELECT
IC6
IC5
SAMPLE IC3 AMP IC3 SUM LNFE TUNE
DISCRIMINATOR
& HOLD
MOD SYNC.
TUNE
IC4
TUNE INDICATOR
TUNE AMP
CD-2184
MOTOR ON
CONT +ve KEY-SWITCH STARTER ON NEON &
LED 440/220V LINK
CONTACTOR
RLB
RLC
SOFT START RLD
OVER LED
0V
0V
3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159
NOTE: CZZ-A14/2 HAS AN ADDITIONAL MAINS POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND TERMINAL BLOCK
PSU 27V
SINGLE PHASE MAINS TB4
(+27V)
TB5 38 CORE
25 CORE FROM DISPLAY
OR INTERSWITCH UNIT TO TRANSCEIVER
TB6
UHF CONNECTOR
SYNC COAX
UHF CONNECTOR
VIDEO COAX
CD-1382
SPECIFICATION DIAGNOSTICS
38 Technical specifications for MkVI Transceivers are 39 The Algorithms in this chapter provide an aid to fault
provided in Table 1, below. diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable
fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring
faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages
Table 1 - Specification generated by the display.
PRE-REQUISITES
Frequency: 3050 10MHz
40 Before any rectification is implemented, the radar
Peak Power 30kW nominal
system must be in a standard configuration, as shown
output:
at the top of the algorithm.
Magnetron Life: 10,000 Hours typical
750pps 20 or 1500pps 40
Turning
Mechanism,
Upmast
Transceiver:
NOTE
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 2400 - 3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz).
(2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base.
(3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base.
Table 4 Fuses
PCB Component Indication
Ref.
START
DISPLAY ON
YES
AFTER 3 MINUTES SWITCH TO RUN
Tx READY?
NO
YES
TO FIGURE 3 TO FIGURE 2
ARE ALL
NO 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & NO DISCONNECT PSU
ARE PSU LEDs ON? +27V LED (ON CONTROL PLB & PLC. SWITCH OFF
BOARD) OFF? TO COOL FUSE LINKS
YES YES
YES
RETRY
ARE ALL
4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & NO
+27V LED (ON CONTROL CONTROL PCB FAULT
BOARD) OFF?
YES
FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO AZIMUTH
NO HEADING LINE
YES
IS THE ANTENNA FAULT IN HL PCB
TURNING? OR INTERCONNECTIONS
NO
IS
NO
TURNING MECHANISM
SWITCH ON
SAFETY SWITCH ON?
YES
NO
IS SOFT START UNIT
SWITCH ON
SWITCHED ON?
YES
ARE ALL
NO IS MAINS IN NO
FOUR SOFT START
INDICATOR ON? CHECK 3-PHASE SUPPLY
INDICATORS ON?
YES YES
YES YES
NO 3-PHASE
IS SOFT START OVER
SWITCHING PCB FAULT
INDICATOR ON?
OR CONNECTION FAULT
YES
YES NO
FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO SYNC SET TO LONG PULSE
NO VIDEO
POOR SIGNALS
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
TO FIGURE 4
ARE
RECEIVER
ARE CO-AX CABLE NO REPAIR FAULTY ARE CO-AX CABLE YES CONNECTIONS OK NO
CONNECTIONS OK? CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS OK? FROM LOW NOISE FRONT RECEIVER FAULT
END & CABLE-
FORMS?
YES NO YES
SET TO STANDBY BY
SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX
IS LED D4 OFF NO NO NO
SAFETY SWITCH
(HEATER CURRENT OK)? IS PSU +9.5V LED ON? IS PSU +9.5V LED ON? PSU FAULT
INTERCONNECTION INTERCONNECTION
CHECK CONTROL
OR MAGNETRON HEATER OR MAGNETRON HEATER
BOARD LEDs
OPEN CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT
NO
IS LED D26 OFF SET SWITCH S1 TO ON
(MUTE OFF)? HL OVERRIDE FAULT MUTE INPUT FROM
Rx MON PCB
YES
NO
YES YES
SWITCH TO STANDBY BY
SWITCHING OFF IS LED D26 OFF NO NO IS LED D26 OFF
PSU FAULT CONTROL BOARD FAULT
GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH, (MUTE OFF)? (MUTE OFF)?
THE AE WILL STOP
YES YES
IS AT RUN,
MODULATOR FIRING? NO NO NO IS PSU NO
INTERMITTENT NOTE? IS -350V AT PSU PLC-2,
(CONTINUOUS AUDIBLE PLB-10 AT LEAST +10V CONTROL BOARD FAULT
WRT TO CHASSIS OK?
NOTE, 800MHz) WRT CHASSIS?
IS THERE
A MODULATOR IS PSU
NO CABLEFORM MODULATOR NO
PLC CONNECTOR OR MODULATOR FAULT PLB-9 AT LEAST 1V PSU FAULT
CONNECTON FAULT TO OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT
CONNECTOR? WRT CHASSIS?
YES YES
PSU FAULT
OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT CD-0295
REPAIR FAULT OR MODULATOR FAULT
25.04.01
POOR SIGNALS
BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
SWITCH MON ON
AT DISPLAY 12m RANGE
IS Tx MON NO
PLUME GOOD? POOR MAGNETRON
(5 MILES) OR WAVEGUIDE FAULT
YES
ARE
Rx MON
FINGERS GOOD? IF 3 MILES OR LESS
NO
(3 MILES OR MORE RADIUS.
ADJUST TUNE FOR FAULTY LIMITER,
STRONGEST LNFE, OR RECEIVER
SIGNAL)
YES
SIGNAL STRENGTH
NOT AFFECTED BY TUNE
CONTROL. TUNE INDICATOR
NOT WORKING
YES NO
AFTER
IS 12V FROM
CHECK VOLTAGE AT NO DISCONNECTING NO
CONTROL BOARD
CONTROL BOARD SKD CONTROL BOARD FAULT
TUNE SUPPLY PCB PRESENT AT PLD-8?
IS PLD-8 9V?
YES YES
NO
CAN
TUNE INPUT
NO . DOES NO TO CONTROL PCB NO
IS TP1 BETWEEN +3V DISCONNECT SKB PLB-2 BE VARIED BETWEEN DISPLAY OR
VOLTAGE AT TP1
& +13V MIN? FROM TUNE SUPPLY PCB CHANGE? 0 & -10 VIA THE DISPLAY INTERCONNECTION FAULT
DURING WARM
UP?
RECEIVER OR CD-0296
RECEIVER FAULT FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
CABLEFORM FAULT 25.04.01
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH
SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE
TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE IMPLEMENTED
BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
45 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance,
however periodically (around every 6 months) check
that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from
corrosion, and wipe the scanner clean using a soft cloth with
mild detergent.
46 Every 12 months open the transceiver and check that
the inside connections are secure and free from
corrosion.
MODULATOR ASSEMBLY
ELECTRONIC
ASSEMBLY
(HINGED DOWN)
RECEIVER BOARD
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
ROTATING JOINT
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0282
CD-2412
Figure 15c - Control PCB: Links, Switches, Potentiometers and Test Points
CD-2413
CD-2414
Figure 17c - Rx Monitor PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test Points
TP6
TP5 TP1
PLA
TP8
TP12
TP9
TP11
ON
S1
RV2
RV3
OFF
RV1 TP10
LK1
TP2
PLB
PLC
TP4
CD-2415
Figure 18c - Power Supply PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test points
CHAPTER 7D
MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (S-BAND)
Tx Monitor ANTENNA
(OPT)
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42)
AZIMUTH GEARBOX
PCB
SAFETY
SOFT MOTOR
3 PHASE
SWITCH POWER
START
MAINS INPUT UNIT
TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9)
NOISE
DIODE
(OPT)
SYNC
TX MICRO-
CONTROLLER RF
CONTROL
PCB LOGARITHMIC
TO/FROM RECEIVER HEAD MAGNETRON
DISPLAY IF
VIDEO
CD-4029
KELVIN HUGHES
TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE L
CABLE: CODE E
COAXIAL CABLE
SEMI-RIGID
SOFT
START
UNIT
S BAND
TRANSMITTER CABLE: CODE K 1 PHASE IN
(CTX-A9)
CABLE: CODE B
CABLE CODE L
INTERSWITCH
DISPLAY
UNIT (OPTIONAL)
OR DIRECT
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
MAINS MAINS
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
80-261-600 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN
CABLE CODE L 1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES
TURNING MECHANISM ANTENNA CABLE A - 2 CORE SMALL
CABLE B - 3 CORE SMALL
25rpm CAE-A42 3.9m CAE-A36 CABLE E - 12 CORE
CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
40rpm (minimum) CAE-A41 2.8m CAE-A39 CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER
CABLE N - 38 CORE
CD-4035
CABLE S - 10 CORE + 2 COAXIAL
7 The S-Band downmast transceiver and antenna 16 The received RF radar returns are passed from the
comprise a transceiver which is bulkhead mounted, antenna to the circulator, which routes them to the
and a mast mounted turning mechanism in a weatherproof Diode (RF) Limiter and Low Noise Front End (LNFE). The
compartment, with antenna attached. A Functional diagram LNFE produces a 60 MHz IF signal which is passed to the
for the S-Band transceiver, turning mechanism and antenna Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356), mounted in
are provided in Figure 8d, and the interconnections are Receiver Assembly (CTX-A364), providing shielding of the
shown in Figure 9d. PCB from high power RF signals. The Logarithmic Receiver
provides two video outputs for use by the displays and one
for the Rx Monitor in the Transceiver.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER
17 A Tx Mon pulse is injected into the video signal to
Transmitter Circuits indicate, on the displays, that sufficient power is being
transmitted.
8 The Transceiver uses a 30 kW magnetron to generate
the RF output. The magnetron is driven by the 30 kW 18 The Logarithmic Receiver provides tuning control of
FET Modulator (CTX-A369), which consists of a 30 kW the LNFE and a tune indication signal to the Tx
Modulator PCB (CTX-A345) mounted on a chassis together Microcontroller PCB. The Logarithmic Receiver provides the
with the high power components, heatsink and RF shield. regulated DC supply for the Low Noise Front End.
9 The 30 kW Modulator provides the following functions: Control Circuits
(1) A 300V power supply. 19 The Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) provides
(2) Driver circuits for the modulator FETs. overall cont rol of t he transc eiver using a
microprocessor, and interfaces with the Display. Commands
(3) The FET modulator which drives the magnetron
to and from the Display may be provided by one of the
(these FETs are chassis mounted on the following:
heatsink).
(4) Associated control and protection circuits. (1) Parallel inputs and outputs to a standard
NUCLEUS display.
10 A switch on the 30 kW Modulator PCB enables the
+27V supply to the 300V power supply to be switched (2) Serial link to the display via an RS232 connection.
off for maintenance purposes (it is normally set to ON). The (3) Serial link to the display via a CAN bus connection.
status of the power supply is indicated by LEDs mounted on
the PCB as follows:
20 The status of the control circuits is indicated by a
(1) When the +27V is disconnected the GREEN 300V number of LEDs as follows:
SAFE LED is lit (ie the switch is set to OFF).
(1) The PROCESSOR RUNNING LED flashes when
(2) When +27V is applied to the 300V power supply the microprocessor is running normally.
the YELLOW 300V UNSAFE LED is illuminated
(2) The HEATER OK LED is lit when the magnetron
(ie the switch is set to ON).
heater circuits are operational.
(3) When the presence of the 300V output is detected
(3) The TUNE LED is lit when the tune signal is
the RED 300V ACTIVE LED is illuminated.
produced by the logarithmic receiver.
11 The status of the power supply is monitored by the
(4) The EXT TRIG LED is lit when an external trigger
protection circuits and the supply is switched off if an
overvoltage is sensed. pulse is detected.
12 The modulator magnetron drive automatically adjusts Power Supplies and Cooling
to compens ate for variati ons in magnetr on
characteristics and to allow for the effects of the magnetron 21 The dc supplies for the Transceiver, with the exception
ageing. Control and protection circuits provide protection of of the 300V for the modulator are provided by a Power
the magnetron from overvoltages, etc. Supply Unit (45-677-124). The mains input is fed to the
power supply via an EMC filter to prevent interference pulses
13 The type of magnetron is detected and for this from the transceiver circuits being conducted out onto the
application as an S-band magnetron is used the RED supply lines. The input is also protected against incoming
S-BAND LED is lit indicating S-band. high voltage spikes. The power supply provides the following
DC supplies for the Transceiver and Turning Mechanism:
14 The RED HEATER TURNDOWN LED is lit when the
heater is switched off due to a fault being detected. (1) +27V to drive the 300V power supply.
15 The output from the magnetron is passed via a (2) +27V for general use.
circulator to the rotating joint and the antenna. (3) +15V.
(4) +5V.
(5) -15V.
22 Cooling of the transceiver is provided by two fans. One
is located within the electronics unit and provides
forced air cooling of the whole transceiver. The second fan is
mounted on the front of the electronics unit and provides
cooling for the high power components in the 25kW
Modulator.
PRE-REQUISITES
31 The diagnostic routines in the flow charts assume that
the radar has been working, and that the system is set SIGNAL FAILURE SIGNAL FAILURE
up for normal operation at the time the fault occurred. MESSAGE MESSAGE
33
Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures is
provided in Figure 10d sheets 1 and 2.
Test Equipment
34 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment
required for fault finding is a high impedance Multimeter.
Table 2 - Fuses
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED
FOR QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS.
CAUTIONS
35 To access the units inside the transceiver it is 36 To access the indicators and the test points on the
necessary to remove the front cover of the transceiver. 25kW Modulator PCB, it is necessary to place the
This allows access to all the units except the 25 kW Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) in the test position, refer to
Modulator PCB. The cover is removed by releasing the six Figure 4d. To place the Electronic Unit in the test position
captive screws. Observe all safety precautions a up to 300V proceed as follows:
is present on the modulator with power applied. (1) Remove all power supplies to the Transceiver.
(2) Release the six captive screws securing the
electronic assembly in position and carefully
remove, ensuring no cables are damaged.
(3) Secure in Electronics Unit the test position on the
side of the frame with the left top and bottom
captive screws (2 only), refer to Figure 4d. It is now
possible to access the LED indicators and the test
points on both sides of the unit.
(4) Restore power to the transceiver, observing all
safety procedures as up to 300V may be present
on the modulator.
37 If it is required to carry out fault diagnosis without the
300V present, set SW1 on the 25 kW Modulator PCB
to OFF. Ensure the switch is returned to the ON position
when testing is complete.
CIRCULATOR (45-750-0008-001)
LIMITER (45-646-608)
RF HEAD (CTX-A384)
MAGNETRON (CTX-A309)
NOISE SOURCE (CAE-A213)
L
RECEIVER (CTX-A364), CONTAINING
LOGARITHMIC RECEIVER (CTX-A356)
PLE
1TB1
9kV
TX MICROCONTROLLER
FLOW
PCB (CTX-A346)
AIR
PLH
FAN
PLA PLC PLD
(45-683-158)
PLE PLB
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-124)
PSU SWITCHES
S1, S2
CD-3968
D22 9G 300V SAFE Lit when +27V disconnected D41 4E PROCESSOR Flashes when processor
from 300V power supply RUNNING running
circuits (SW1 set to OFF)
D42 4E EXT TRIG Lit when external trigger
pulses present
D23 9F 300V UNSAFE Lit when +27V applied to 300V
power supply circuits D43 4E HEATER OK Lit when heater OK, flashes
(SW1 set to ON) slowly when timer running,
flashes fast when heater has
D24 4G 300V ACTIVE Lit when 300V supply present timed out
Note: only lit when Tx Run
command present. D44 4E Not used
D34 7D S BAND Lit for S-band magnetron 39 Test points are located on the following PCBs;
(1) 25 kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)
Grid Grid
TP1 7H TR14 Gate Drive (27/300V FET) TP34 2J Input end of R10 (RUN STOP Command)
TP2 8H TR15 Gate Drive (27/300V FET) TP35 4J IC1 pin 10 (Stop Run)
TP8 9C +27V Power TP41 4E/H FET Leading Edge Drive Level
TP9 4J +27V_B
TP10 3J -15V
Grid
TP13 5C CAN Tx
TP14 5C CAN Rx
EP1 1E 0V
EP2 8D 0V
TP8 TP39
HSMG-C670
25446NAH
SW1
TP6 D23 D22
9 SL4-CL-V PLB +
TP38 HSMY-C670 +
TP2
TP32
TR15
STW50N10
8
T1
ETD49 TR14
STW50N10
7
TP1
MCDIS02T03
SW4
R19
0R22
TP27
+ D34
HSMS-C670 TP33
6
TP26
HSMS-C670
D33
TP24
+
TP4
2x0.6mH C2
L2 6800 40V
C28
68 400V C29
68 400V
5
CTX-A350
T2
TP15 TP31
4 LK1 TP9
TP7
TP35
D24
622-3424ES
TP3
PLA
HSMS-C670
R125
R126 0R1 10W
5R0 50W TP41
TP40
3 TP25
MCDIS02T03
10K
SW2
TP10
RV1
TP5 TP18
TP42
RV4 TP21 TP17
TP28 RV5 RV2
10K 10K
2
5K
TP14 TP20 TP19 TP34
TP16
TP36
TP11
TP12 TP30
TP29 TP23 TP22
1
TP37
TP13
A B C D E F G H J
CD-3980
Figure 5d - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations
1 PLD
PLC B16P-SHF-1AA
622-3424ES EP2
TP1
PLM
D18
B2P-SHF-1AA B2P-SHF-1AA
PLS
1 1
PLT
TP6
TP4
TP5
SL14-CL-V
SL6-CL-V
PLB
1 1K
PLN RV1
B2P-SHF-1AA
1 TP10 TP8
PLH
TP9
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP12 TP11
TP7
SKF TP13 TP14
SL5-CL-V
1
+
PLK
D44
+HSMY-C670
D43
B6P-SHF-1AA
219-8LPST
+HSMY-C670
PLX
IC1
SW1
C167CR-L25M D42
+HSMY-C670
D41
HSMY-C670
219-6LPST
SW2
1
SL10-CL-V
PLA
B8P-SHF-1AA
PLG
TP16
1
TP2
PLP
TP15
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP3
SKW
PLJ
EP1
1 1
PLV
22-27-2041
B2P-SHF-1AA
87123-0601
CD-3981
L14
L3
220nH
820nH
CV1
TP6
TP4 TP7
TP5
TP2
TP1 TP3
TP8
Figure 7d - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations
S-BAND ANTENNA
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42)
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB (CAE-A180)
220V/440V 3 PHASE MAINS SUPPLY SOFT START UNIT 3 PHASE TO MOTOR TURNING 180:1 AZIMUTH
CZZ-A14 MOTOR
HEADING LINE
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE
GENERATION
+27V MOTOR START +27V
SAFETY
SWITCH
+27V MOD
TX MON TX MON
NEON
RF HEAD
S-BAND TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER (CTX-A9) NOISE
25kW FET MODULATOR CTX-A369/CTX-A345 SOURCE
CAE-A213
300V POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
300V
SAFE (D22)
MAINS INPUT +27V FET MAGNETRON CIRCULATOR DIODE BANDPASS LNFE
300V FET DRIVE MAGNETRON OUTPUT PULSE
EMC FILTER 300V DRIVER CTX-A309 45-780-0008-001 LIMITER FILTER CAE-A217
DRIVE 45-646-608 45-750-0009-001
45-680-003 UNSAFE +100V
(D23)
POWER 300V
SUPPLIES ACTIVE
(D24) S-BAND
CONTROL AND
PROTECTION (D34)
FAN +5V & TUNE
MAG HEATER
60MHz IF
45-683-158 CIRCUITS HEATER
SELF START TURNDOWN
ACTIVE (D33)
MAG HEAT ON
LOGARITHMIC
RUN MOD
MONITOR
RECEIVER
MOD TRIG
CTX-A364/
CTX-A356
LOG AMP
NOISE DIODE
RX TRIG
PULSE BANDPASS
TUNE WIDTH FILTER
CONTROL
CONTROL
CIRCUITS PULSE LENGTH CIRCUITS
DC SUPPLIES
TUNE IND
POWER SUPPLY TUNE
LOCAL 45-677-124 LOG AMP
MP/LP
START
SWITCH TX RUN
VIA PLF PARALLEL SIGNALS
TO/FROM DISPLAY MUTE
AZ/HL TX MON PULSE VIDEO
OUTPUT 1
PROCESSOR
TX READY VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT
RUNNING VIDEO
CIRCUITS
(D41) OUTPUT 2
RX MON
TO/FROM HEATER OK
DISPLAY (D43)
CAN BUS TO/FROM DISPLAY TO
SYNC OUTPUT 1 DISPLAYS
RS232 TO/FROM DISPLAY
EXT TRIG
SYNC OUTPUT 2
(D42)
EXT TRIGGER
PRE-PULSE OUTPUT
TUNE
(D18) OPTIONAL EXTRA PRE-PULSE OUTPUTS
FAN
CTX-A379
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX-A346
CD-4027
Figure 8d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Functional Diagram Figure 8d
S-BAND ANTENNA
CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39
PLA
TB3
TB1 LOC 1 AZ/HL PCB
MOTOR AERIAL SOFT 220V/440V GEARBOX
3 PHASE MAINS IN PROTECTION & START ROTATING JOINT
START MOTOR
FROM ISOLATOR ISOLATION SWITCH LOC 10
SAFETY
TB1
SWITCH (TB1)
DELAY LOC.1
RF COAX
TB2
RF HEAD
NOT TERMINAL
TB1
TB1
USED BLOCK
LOC. 5
+40V SELF
SKF
START
SKA
SKA
MAINS INPUT L L
PLC
PLA
2 CORE SCREENED N FILTER N LOGARITHMIC
E E PSU LOW NOISE
NOISE SOURCE CIRCULATOR DIODE BANDPASS RECEIVER
PLB
45-677-124 FRONT END
PLA
PLD
CAE-A213 45-780-0008-001 LIMITER FILTER PCB
SKB
LOC. 2 (LNFE)
PLE
45-646-608 45-750-0009-001 CTX-A359
CAE-A217
FAN PLE HEATSINK
LOC. 7
45-683-158
PLB PLD PLC
PLB
38 CORE MULTICORE
30kW
PLB
PLA
FROM DISPLAY OR TB1
TERMS MODULATOR
INTERSWITCH UNIT 4mm MAGNETRON
CTX-A369/CTX-A345 3mm CTX-A309
PLJ
LOC. 4
PLS
SYNC 1 O/P
BRAID
Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB PLH SKF PLC
PLA
SYNC 2 O/P HEATSINK HEATSINK
PLT
CTX-A346
LOC.3
PLP
PRE-PULSE O/P
PLD
FROM DISPLAY OR
PRE-PULSE
PLG
(OPTIONAL)
PLX SKW PLV
CAN BUS
PLE
FAN
CTX-A379
VIDEO 1 O/P
VIDEO 2 O/P
CD-4028 TRANSCEIVER CTX-A9
Figure 9d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection Diagram Figure 9d
RADAR FAULT
DETECTED AT DISPLAY
(AT STANDBY)
NO
FAILURE MESSAGE
ON Tx/Rx PSU NO CHECK CONNECTIONS, FAILURE MESSAGE - NO SYNC
IS MAINS NEON LIT? MAINS INPUT & - NO AZIMUTH - NO VIDEO
POWER SUPPLY FUSE(8A) - NO HEADING LINE OR NO MESSAGE
YES
TO SHEET 2
YES
YES
ON Tx IS MAINS ON
MICROCONTROLLER NO NO IS MAINS ON NO NO
IS D43 (HEATER V) SWITCH SINGLE PHASE INDICATOR ON SWITCH THREE PHASE
IS D41 FLASHING? POWER SUPPLY FAULT INDICATOR ON
LED LIT? MAINS ON SOFT START MAINS ON
(PROC RUNNING INVERTER ON?
UNIT ON?
LED)
1S +24V 1S +24V
YES Tx MICROCONTROLLER DISCONNECT CABLEFORM PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO
IS D43 (HEATER V) FAULT OR CABLEFORM TO RECEIVER & MODULATOR IS TRANSCEIVER Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB IS TRANSCEIVER TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB
LED LIT? PLA PINS 1 & 2 ON RUNNING? TB2 PINS 1 & 2 ON RUNNING?
CONNECTION FAULT TO SEE IF FAULT CLEARS INVERTER? SOFT START
UNIT?
FROM SHEET 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
- NO SYNC
- NO VIDEO
OR NO MESSAGE
POOR SIGNALS
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC BUT NO WARNING FOR
(MODULATOR FIRING)
NO VIDEO SHOWING
NO NO SWITCH MON ON
ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs
AT 12 MILE RANGE
YES YES
IS LNFE OR LOGARITHMIC
AT RUN, IS Tx
MODULATOR FIRING NO NO IS D23 (300V UNSAFE) NO POWER SUPPLY OR NO RECEIVER PCB FAULT OR
IS D24 (300V ACTIVE) LED MICRO CONTROLLOR PCB,
AN INTERMITTENT NOTE? LED ON MODULATOR LIT? MODULATOR PCB FAULT TUNE INPUT FROM DISPLAY
MODULATOR PCB LIT? D18 (TUNE) LED LIT?
TO RECEIVER FAULT
CABLEFORM MODULATOR
MODULATOR MV SMPS FAULT
OR MICROCONTROLLER PCB Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB
MODULATOR FAULT OR NO RUN COMMAND
FAULT OR NO TRIGGER OR CONNECTION FAULT
FROM CONTROL BOARD FROM CONTROL BOARD
CD-4192
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH
SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE
TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED
FOR QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
41 The following paragraphs describe preventive
maintenance, expanding on the Diagnostics
information.
42 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance,
however, periodically (around every six months) check
that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from
corrosion, and wipe the antenna clean using a soft cloth and
mild detergent.
43 Every 12 months open the transceiver and check that
the inside connections are secure and free from
corrosion.
2 The configuration shown in Figures 1e and 2e, is 5 The transceiver is normally muted whenever the
provided with a single phase mains input to the antenna ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and
transceiver, which provides dc supplies for the turning motor. sector transmission are standard facilities, with options for
pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation.
Tx Monitor ANTENNA
(OPT)
CTX-A198
TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A8)
RX MON
(OPT)
TX MICRO-
CONTROLLER RF
CONTROL
PCB LOGARITHMIC
TO/FROM RECEIVER HEAD MAGNETRON
DISPLAY VIDEO IF
CD-3880
TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE E OR G
12 CORE (CAE-A30-6)
25 CORE (CAE-A30-5)
WAVEGUIDE 16
X BAND
1 PHASE IN
CABLE: CODE K TRANSMITTER
(CTX-A8)
38-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 2 OR 3)
12-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 3)
INTERSWITCH DISPLAY
UNIT (OPTIONAL)
OR DIRECT
OPTIONAL
MAINS
ISOLATOR
80-261-600
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES
TABLE 1
ANTENNA OPTIONS CABLE E - 12 CORE
CABLE G - 25 CORE
1.3m ANTENNA (CAE-A50)* CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
1.8m ANTENNA (CAE-A13/2) CABLE N - 38 CORE
2.4m ANTENNA (CAE-A25) CABLE R - 10 CORE + 2 COAXIAL
CD-3879
* NOT TYPE APPROVED
31 The above values are the nominal settings. Input Power Single Phase: 110V/220V ac input
32 Receiver specifications are detailed opposite. Input Power 3-Phase
Low Speed (24rpm): 275W, 400VA
PRE-REQUISITES
34 The diagnostic routines in the flow charts assume that SIGNAL FAILURE SIGNAL FAILURE
the radar has been working, and that the system is set MESSAGE MESSAGE
up for normal operation at the time the fault occurred.
Sync No Sync. Azimuth No Azimuth
TEST EQUIPMENT
37 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment
required for fault finding is a high impedance multimeter.
Table 2 - Fuses
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED FOR QUALIFIED
TECHNICIANS.
CAUTIONS
Semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage.
Observe the following precautions when handling static sensitive devices in their un-terminated state,
or when handling modules containing such devices.
Persons removing modules from an equipment using these devices should be earthed
by a wrist strap and a resistor.
Soldering irons used during repair operations must be low voltage types with earth tips
and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored
and transported in anti-static bags.
For detailed information, refer to British Standard BS 5783 or other equivalent standard.
38
To access the units inside the transceiver it is 39 To access the indicators and the test points on the
necessary to remove the front cover of the transceiver. 25kW Modulator PCB, it is necessary to place the
This allows access to all the units except the 25kW Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) in the test position, refer to
Modulator PCB. The cover is removed by releasing the six Figure 6e. To place the Electronics Unit in the test position,
captive screws. Observe all safety precautions as up to 300V proceed as follows:
is present on the modulator with power applied.
(1) Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2) Release the six captive screws securing the
electronic assembly in position and carefully
remove, ensuring that no cables are damaged.
(3) Secure the Electronics Unit in the test position on
the side of the frame, with the left top and bottom
captive screws (2 only), refer to Figure 6e. It is now
possible to access the LED indicators and the test
points on both sides of the unit.
(4) Restore power to the transceiver, observing all
safety procedures, as up to 300VV may be
present on the modulator.
40 If it is required to implement fault diagnosis without
300V present, set switch SW1 on the 25kW Modulator
PCB to OFF. Ensure that the switch is returned to the ON
position when testing is complete.
RX MONITOR
CAVITY CTX-A173
RF HEAD (CTX-A380)
CIRCULATOR (45-646-604)
1
MAGNETRON (CTX-A317)
C
LP
PLE
1TB1
9kV
TX MICROCONTROLLER
FLOW
PCB (CTX-A346)
AIR
PLH
FAN
PLA PLC PLD
(45-683-158)
PLE PLB
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-124)
PSU SWITCHES
S1, S2
ROTATING
JOINT
BRUSHLESS
AZIMUTH/ MOTOR
SHIM
HEADING LINE PCB
SHIM
TB2
TB1
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE PCB
CAE-A106-2
PL3
PL2
PL4
PL1
TB1
CD-3918
ROTATING
JOINT
AZIMUTH/
SHIM
HEADING LINE PCB
SHIM
MOTOR
MOTOR
STARTER
PCB
+VE
DRAZAH EVAW OIDAR
m2 NAHT SSEL TA R E G N AD TERMINAL
-VE
TERMINAL
TB1
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE PCB
CAE-A106-2
PLA
FILTER
N N
MAINS
L L
MOTOR
+26V MOTOR
STARTER PCB
TB1
CD-3917
CD-3968
D18 8F TUNE Illuminated when Tune Ind TP19 2H IC8a Pin 3 (SET Mag Current)
signal is present TP20 2G Output of IC7 (Sample and Hold)
D41 4E PROCESSOR Flashes when processor TP21 2G IC7 pin 11 (Sample Pulse)
RUNNING is running
TP22 1J Output of IC3a (Main FET I is tripped)
D42 4E EXT TRIG Illuminated when External
Trigger pulses are present TP23 1H Output of IC3b (27V Power >6 amps) (I/P
Overload Trip)
D43 4E HEATER OK Illuminated when Heater
OK, flashes slowly when TP24 6E Output of IC4b (27V Power >3 amps, Heater
timer is running. Flashes Turndown)
Fast when heater has
timed out TP25 3F Output of IC10 (Main FETs I Mon Pulse)
TP3 1B Reset Serial Link LK1 4G MADE Connects 300V power output to
FET drivers
TP4 7A Azimuth Pulses
TP12 5B Sample & Hold Output SW3-A 2E MADE Slope Control Circuit working
EP1 1E 0V
EP2 8D 0V
TP8 TP39
HSMG-C670
25446NAH
SW1
TP6 D23 D22
9 SL4-CL-V PLB +
TP38 HSMY-C670 +
TP2
TP32
TR15
STW50N10
8
T1
ETD49 TR14
STW50N10
7
TP1
MCDIS02T03
SW4
R19
0R22
TP27
+ D34
HSMS-C670 TP33
6
TP26
HSMS-C670
D33
TP24
+
TP4
2x0.6mH C2
L2 6800 40V
C28
68 400V C29
68 400V
5
CTX-A350
T2
TP15 TP31
4 LK1 TP9
TP7
TP35
D24
622-3424ES
TP3
PLA
HSMS-C670
R125
R126 0R1 10W
5R0 50W TP41
TP40
3 TP25
MCDIS02T03
10K
SW2
TP10
RV1
TP5 TP18
TP42
RV4 TP21 TP17
TP28 RV5 RV2
10K 10K
2
5K
TP14 TP20 TP19 TP34
TP16
TP36
TP11
TP12 TP30
TP29 TP23 TP22
1
TP37
TP13
A B C D E F G H J
CD-3980
Figure 7e - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations
1 PLD
PLC B16P-SHF-1AA
622-3424ES EP2
TP1
PLM
D18
B2P-SHF-1AA B2P-SHF-1AA
PLS
1 1
PLT
TP6
TP4
TP5
SL14-CL-V
SL6-CL-V
PLB
1 1K
PLN RV1
B2P-SHF-1AA
1 TP10 TP8
PLH
TP9
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP12 TP11
TP7
SKF TP13 TP14
SL5-CL-V
1
+
PLK
D44
+HSMY-C670
B6P-SHF-1AA
D43
219-8LPST
+HSMY-C670
PLX
SW1
IC1
C167CR-L25M D42
+HSMY-C670
D41
HSMY-C670
219-6LPST
SW2
1
SL10-CL-V
PLA
B8P-SHF-1AA
PLG
TP16
1
TP2
PLP
TP15
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP3
SKW
PLJ
EP1
1 1
PLV
22-27-2041
B2P-SHF-1AA
87123-0601
CD-3981
L14
L3
220nH
820nH
CV1
TP6
TP4 TP7
TP5
TP2
TP1 TP3
TP8
Figure 9e - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
44 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance.
However, periodically (around every six months)
check that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from
corrosion, and wipe the antenna clean using a soft cloth and
mild detergent.
46 Every 12 months, open the transceiver and check that
the inside connections are secure and free from
corrosion.
X-BAND ANTENNA
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A30-5 OR -6)
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB CAE-A106-2
MOTOR STARTER PCB
DC SUPPLY CTX-A359 (CAE-A30-6 ONLY) 90:1 AZIMUTH
OR TURNING
BRUSHLESS MOTOR PCB MOTOR
HEADING LINE
CAE-A236 (CAE-A30-5 ONLY) AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE
GENERATION
+27V MOTOR START +27V
SAFETY
+27V MOD SWITCH
TX MON TX MON
NEON
300V POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
RF HEAD
300V
SAFE (D22)
MAINS INPUT +27V FET OUTPUT PULSE MAGNETRON CIRCULATOR DIODE LIMITER LNFE
300V FET DRIVE MAGNETRON
EMC FILTER 300V DRIVER CTX-A317 45-646-604 45-646-603 CTX-A323
DRIVE
45-680-003 UNSAFE +100V
(D23)
POWER 300V
SUPPLIES ACTIVE
(D24) S-BAND
CONTROL AND
PROTECTION (D34)
FAN +5V & TUNE
MAG HEATER
60MHz IF
45-683-158 CIRCUITS HEATER
SELF START TURNDOWN
ACTIVE (D33)
MAG HEAT ON
LOGARITHMIC
RUN MOD
MONITOR
RECEIVER
MOD TRIG
CTX-A364/
CTX-A356
LOG AMP
RX TRIG
PULSE BANDPASS
TUNE WIDTH FILTER
CONTROL
CONTROL
CIRCUITS PULSE LENGTH CIRCUITS
DC SUPPLIES
TUNE IND
POWER SUPPLY TUNE
LOCAL 45-677-124
MP/LP LOG AMP
START
SWITCH TX RUN
(VIA PLF) PARALLEL SIGNALS
TO/FROM DISPLAY MUTE
AZ/HL TX MON PULSE VIDEO
OUTPUT 1
PROCESSOR
TX READY VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT
RUNNING VIDEO
CIRCUITS
(D41) OUTPUT 2
RX MON
TO/FROM HEATER OK
DISPLAY (D43)
CAN BUS TO/FROM DISPLAY TO
SYNC OUTPUT 1 DISPLAYS
RS232 TO/FROM DISPLAY
EXT TRIG
SYNC OUTPUT 2
(D42)
EXT TRIGGER
PRE-PULSE OUTPUT
TUNE
(D18) OPTIONAL EXTRA PRE-PULSE OUTPUTS
FAN
CTX-A379
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX-A346
CD-3909
Figure 10e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Functional Diagram Figure 10e
X-BAND ANTENNA
CAE-A27, CAE-A13-2, CAE-A14
TB2
PL3
PL1
HIGH SPEED TX. MON NEON
BRUSHLESS MOTOR
PL2
MOTOR DRIVER
CAE-A236
PL5
PL4 2 CORE CABLE
PLA
AZ/HL PCB
LOW SPEED MOTOR GEARBOX CAE-A106-2
+26V
TB1
CAE-A30-6 ROTATING JOINT LOC 9
PLA
LOW SPEED SAFETY
FILTER
TB1
MOTOR SWITCH (TB1)
LOC.1
+26V MOTOR STARTER
PLB
WAVEGUIDE 16
CTX-A359
RECEIVER
TERMINAL
TB1
TB1
MONITOR
BLOCK CAVITY
+40V SELF CTX-A173
SKF
START
MAINS INPUT L L
PLC
PLA
2 CORE SCREENED N FILTER N
E E PSU
45-677-124
PLD
LOC. 2
RF HEAD
LOC. 5
FAN PLE HEATSINK
SKA
45-683-158
PLB LOGARITHMIC
LOW NOISE
DIODE RECEIVER
PLB
PLB CIRCULATOR FRONT END
38 CORE MULTICORE LIMITER PCB
45-646-604 (LNFE)
PLE
25kW
PLB
PLA
FROM DISPLAY OR TB1 45-646-603 CTX-A359
TERMS MODULATOR CTX-A323
INTERSWITCH UNIT 4mm MAGNETRON LOC. 7
CTX-A369/CTX-A345 3mm CTX-A317
PLJ
LOC. 4
PLS
SYNC 1 O/P
PLD PLC
BRAID
Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB PLC
PLA
SYNC 2 O/P HEATSINK HEATSINK
PLT
CTX-A346
LOC.3
PLP
PRE-PULSE O/P
PLD
FROM DISPLAY OR
PRE-PULSE
PLG
(OPTIONAL)
PLX SKW PLV
CAN BUS
PLE
FAN
CTX-A379
VIDEO 1 O/P
VIDEO 2 O/P
CD-3881 TRANSCEIVER CTX-A8
Figure 11e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection Diagram Figure 11e
RADAR FAULT
DETECTED AT DISPLAY
(AT STANDBY)
NO
FAILURE MESSAGE
ON Tx/Rx PSU NO CHECK CONNECTIONS, FAILURE MESSAGE - NO SYNC
IS MAINS NEON LIT? MAINS INPUT & - NO AZIMUTH - NO VIDEO
POWER SUPPLY FUSE(8A) - NO HEADING LINE OR NO MESSAGE
YES
TO SHEET 2
YES
YES
ON Tx IS MAINS ON
MICROCONTROLLER NO NO IS MAINS ON NO NO
IS D43 (HEATER V) SWITCH SINGLE PHASE INDICATOR ON SWITCH THREE PHASE
IS D41 FLASHING? POWER SUPPLY FAULT INDICATOR ON
LED LIT? MAINS ON SOFT START MAINS ON
(PROC RUNNING INVERTER ON?
UNIT ON?
LED)
1S +24V 1S +24V
YES Tx MICROCONTROLLER DISCONNECT CABLEFORM PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO
IS D43 (HEATER V) FAULT OR CABLEFORM TO RECEIVER & MODULATOR IS TRANSCEIVER Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB IS TRANSCEIVER TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB
LED LIT? PLA PINS 1 & 2 ON RUNNING? TB2 PINS 1 & 2 ON RUNNING?
CONNECTION FAULT TO SEE IF FAULT CLEARS INVERTER? SOFT START
UNIT?
FROM SHEET 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
- NO SYNC
- NO VIDEO
OR NO MESSAGE
POOR SIGNALS
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC BUT NO WARNING FOR
(MODULATOR FIRING)
NO VIDEO SHOWING
NO NO SWITCH MON ON
ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs
AT 12 MILE RANGE
YES YES
IS LNFE OR LOGARITHMIC
AT RUN, IS Tx
MODULATOR FIRING NO NO IS D23 (300V UNSAFE) NO POWER SUPPLY OR NO RECEIVER PCB FAULT OR
IS D24 (300V ACTIVE) LED MICRO CONTROLLOR PCB,
AN INTERMITTENT NOTE? LED ON MODULATOR LIT? MODULATOR PCB FAULT TUNE INPUT FROM DISPLAY
MODULATOR PCB LIT? D18 (TUNE) LED LIT?
TO RECEIVER FAULT
CABLEFORM MODULATOR
MODULATOR MV SMPS FAULT
OR MICROCONTROLLER PCB Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB
MODULATOR FAULT OR NO RUN COMMAND
FAULT OR NO TRIGGER OR CONNECTION FAULT
FROM CONTROL BOARD FROM CONTROL BOARD
CD-4192
CHAPTER 8A
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS
TESTING PROCEDURE
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON
THE TRANSFORMER WHEN SHIPS THREE
PHASE MAINS IS CONNECTED AND LIVE.
NOTE:
If the output voltage is not present check FS1.
10 120
2 OFF SELF CAPTIVATING
70 PANEL SCREW
10
85
40.0
A 195.0
B B
7.5
10.0
12 116.0
140
CD-2299
TB2
TB1 0V
0V 1
CORE 1
4 110V
2 TERMINAL
SHIP'S 380 V
SUPPLY CORE 2 3 BLOCK ON
FROM
0V FLYING LEAD
ISOLATOR
3 TO
440V FILTER UNIT
CABLE 319 K 2 110V FS1
CORE 3 4
1 NC
5
OUTPUT VOLTAGES(TB2)
LINK 2 & 3 FOR 220 V
1 & 3
LINK FOR 110 V
2 & 4
CD-2300
Master/Slave Kit 13 For Nucleus 5000 and Split 6000A Systems the
interfaces are mounted in a separate box.
7 Implement the instructions in Paragraph 17, as
required. To fit the Kit follow Paragraph 23 then Overall dimensions: 410mm long, 250mm wide, 162mm
Paragraph 27 and 28 for Nucleus 6000 or Paragraphs 32 high.
and 33 for Nucleus 5000. External connections are
described in Paragraphs 34 to 42. All Installations
8 Implement the Interfacing & Setting up instructions in
14 Implement the instructions in Paragraphs 54 and 55
Paragraphs 43 to 56. The Master/Slave Interface PCB
after fitting the Installation Kit.
Link functions are described in Paragraphs 66 and 67.
1 RADAR INPUT
TO NUCLEUS
IF INTERFACE NEEDED
USE HRC-A192/193
NO YES
(WITH APPROPRIATE
SETTING UP INSTRUCTIONS)
NOTE:
(1) Nucleus connected to 2 Radar Transmitter/Aerial only.
(2) A Kelvin Hughes Transmitter/Aerial controlled by the
Nucleus Display counts as one of the possible 2 Radar
Transmitter/Aerials, and its Interface requirements must be
listed on the Indent.
2 RADAR INPUT
TO NUCLEUS
RADAR 1 RADAR 2
IS NUCLEUS MASTER
TO KH SYSTEM (SINGLE NUCLEUS AS SLAVE
OR INTERSWITCHED)
3 HOLES
135 12.0
MASTER/SLAVE
ADAPTER PCB
325
410
370
MASTER/SLAVE
INTERFACE PCB
MASTER/SLAVE SYNCHRO
OR DIVIDE BY 4 PCB
250
LOW RATIO COMPASS PCB
165
CABLE ENTRY
CD-2427
INTERFACE PLATE
MASTER/SLAVE
ADAPTER PCB
MASTER/SLAVE
SELECTOR PCB
MASTER/SLAVE SYNCHRO
OR DIVIDE BY 4 PCB
CD-2431
2 1 TB5A
1
S1
1
S2
1
S3
MSB 1
LK1 TP2
IC2
TP1
TB7A TP4
LK2
1
TP3
LK3 TP6
TP5
28
LK4 TP8
TP7
LK5 TP10
MASTER/SLAVE
TP9
SYNCHRO PCB (HRC-A290)
LK6 TP12
TP11
6 5 4 2 1
1
SKA
CD-2432
SYNCHRO (3 phase)
RESOLVER (2 phase)
** HRC-A290/2 PCB - Open Links 1 and 2. Four off 5K6 Ohm Resistors are to
be fitted from TP1 to TP2, TP3 to TP4, TP2 to TP6, TP4 to TP8.
Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 On Master/slave Radar 1 and/or Radar 2 Input using HRC-A192 Kit
Interface PCB HRC-A197 (part of HRC-A192 Kit) (Master/Slave)
45 Refer to Table 6, below. 49 PULSE INPUTS up to 360 per Rev for HRC-A197 PCB
Table 6 Radar Link & Switch Settings on Master/Slave For Azimuth Input Noise Suppression
Interface PCB MAKE Link 24 (Radar 1)
MAKE Link 25 (Radar 2)
RADAR 2 RADAR 1
Radar 1 And/or Radar 2 Inputs 8 19 20 21 SW2 6 7 9 10 15 16
46 Radar 1 and Radar 2 may be different types. Set the o o o x - x x o x x o
links and Switches for the correct type on each
channel. 2 phase 90V rms x o o 45 o o x x x o 45
90 pulses/rev
(use 1 phase
1024 Pulse per Rev. Azimuth using CDY-A55 Kit only)
(Divide By 4)
2 phase 6V rms x o o 45 x o x x x o 45
47 The output from this kit feeds into HRC-A192 Kit 90 pulses/rev
(Master/Slave Interface). (use 1 phase
only)
Table 7 1024 Pulse per Rev. Azimuth 2 phase 115V x o o 33 o x o x x o 33
rms
132 pulses/rev o o o o x x o
(use 1 phase x 66 o 66
INPUT INPUT OUTPUT REMARKS only)
TYPE VOLTS PULSES/
REV OR
+ to -20V square x o o 45 o x o x x o 45
1024 Pulse +3 to 7V from 256 wave
0V 180 pulses/rev o o o o x x o
x 90 o 90
20V pulse x o o 33 x x o x x o 33
RADAR 2 RADAR 1 + 132 pulses/rev
o o x o x x o
x 66 o 66
8 19 20 21 SW2 6 7 9 10 15 16 SW1
o o o x - x x o x x o 64
SW1 and SW2 Settings for Azimuth Ratios from Table 8 Video Switch Settings on HRC-A197
51 Refer to Table 10, below. 53 Refer to Table 12, below.
SW POLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RATIO 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 RADAR 2 RADAR 1
INPUT POLARITY SW4 SW3
33 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
NOTE:
RADAR 1 and RADAR 2 Buffer Amps (RAN-A23/* and/or
Heading Line Inputs to HRC-A197 PCB (Part of HRC- RAN-A29/*) must be set for +ve or -ve Video as required.
A192 Kit) or CDY-A297 PCB (Part of CDY-A55 Kit) The output is a +ve to feed HRC-A197 PCB.
52 Refer to Table 11, below.
NUCLEUS DISPLAY SETTINGS -
COMMISSIONING
Table 11 - Heading Line Inputs to HRC-A197 PCB or 54 Implement the following:
CDY-A297 PCB
(1) Set Radar Display to ON.
(2) Make Link 26 on Display System PCB (Grid A3).
HEADING LINE LINKS (3) From STANDBY screen, select INSTALLATION
menu box.
(4) Position cursor in the DISPLAY box. Slave,
RADAR 2 RADAR 1 Master, Other, may be chosen.
(5) Select OTHER option. Single Tx, Master Slave
Interface, Dual Interswitch, may be chosen.
INPUT TYPE 3 4 27 1 2 26 (6) Select Master Slave Interface. A and B Outlines
show. (Azimuth is auto set to 4096).
OPEN CONTACTS - - - x o x (7) Move cursor to A and select.
(HRC-A192 only)
(Radar 1 as Master (8) Move cursor to lower left hand area of A outline to
only) get Slave, Master, Other, choice.
(Powered from this (9) Select Master or Slave as required for Radar 1.
PCB) Radar 2 is preset to Slave.
POSITIVE GOING o x o o x o (10) Remove Link 26.
PULSE (11) Exit Menu.
e.g. -ve 15V to 0V
0V to +5V (12) When the Transmitter Ready Indicator is ON, SET
RADAR DISPLAY to RADAR A, and SHORTEST
NEGATIVE GOING x o o x o o RANGE.
PULSE
e.g. +ve 5V to 0V Settings On System PCB (HRC-A159 for 6000, HRC-A160
for 5000, HRC-A343 for 5000A)
NOTE: 55 Implement the following:
Links 26 and 27 do not exist on CDY-A297 PCB (1) Set RV5 (Sync Delay, Grid H5) to MINIMUM
(Anti-clockwise).
TB2
SKK
26 17
1 10
2 1 2 1
26 TB2A 17
TB7B TB5A
SKF
LK27 LK26
SYNC1
RV1
S4 S3 SKH
TP2
RV3 SYNC2
S2 S1
LK3 LK4 LK2 LK1
SKE
TP1 VID1
LK9
SKG
LK7
MASTER/SLAVE VID2
LK22 LK23 RV4 RV2
INTERFACE PCB LK15
LK16 SKG1
(HRC-A197) LK19 VID
LK20
LK10 OUT
LK21
RV5 RV6 SKH1
D19
TP4 SYNC
LK6 OUT
CD-2417
Heading Line Correction for HRC-A290 or CDY-A297 Link And Switch Settings For Low Ratio Compass PCB
PCB (Master/Slave Synchro or Divide by 4) (HRC-A107)
64 The LINK settings for Nucleus systems are:
60 Implement the following:
(1) Link 1 MADE, Link 2 OPEN - For all ratios and
(1) Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 to position F. 2048 pulses per rev output.
(2) Using the Radar 2 Host Display, note the angle of (2) For special applications outside the Nucleus
a video target with respect to the Heading Line. system, the links may be set to Link 1 OPEN, Link
Compare this with the angle seen on the Radar 2 2 MADE, to give 1:1 ratio and 4096 pulses per rev.
Slave Display.
65 The SWITCH settings for Nucleus systems are:
61 To correct any difference:
(1) Set SW2 to 2 times the division ratio required. The
(1) Adjust SW1 (22.5 degree steps) anti-clockwise, ON position gives the SW2 count. e.g. Set SW2 to
i.e. from F to D etc., until the target has been 2 for 1:1 ratio and 72 for 36:1 ratio.
over-adjusted. Turn SW1 back 1 step.
(2) Set SW1 to SW2 setting minus 1. The OFF
(2) Adjust SW2 (1.4 degree steps) anti-clockwise, position gives the SW1 count. e.g. Set SW1 to 1 if
until the target has been over-adjusted. Turn SW2 is at 2 and 71 if SW2 is at 72.
SW1 back 1 step.
(3) Adjust SW3 (0.088 degree steps) anti-clockwise
Table 14 Compass PCB Switch Settings for Nucleus
to give the final correction.
NOTE:
For some installations with longer delays, C58 may be
incremented to1nF. (HRC-A197/2)
Switches
71 The switch functions on the Master/Slave Interface
PCB are as follows:
(1) SW1 sets the division ratio for Radar 1 Azimuth,
using PLL.
(2) SW2 sets the division ratio for Radar 2 Azimuth,
using PLL.
(3) SW3 sets the Radar 1 Video for + ve or - ve signal.
(4) SW4 sets the Radar 2 Video for + ve or - ve signal.
Potentiometers
72 The potentiometer functions on the Master/Slave
Interface PCB are as follows:
(1) RV1, Radar 1 Video input to give +ve 5.5V
standard Video.
(2) RV2, Radar 1 Noise Level threshold for high noise
inputs.
(3) RV3, Radar 2 Video input to give +ve 5.5V
standard Video.
(4) RV4, Radar 2 Noise Level threshold for high noise
inputs.
(5) RV5, Radar 1 lock Delay.
(6) RV6, Radar 2 Lock Delay.
Parts
77 Table 15 provides a list of parts.
H H N N H H
R R N N R R
KELVIN C C R R C C
DESCRIPTION HUGHES - - - - - -
CODE NO. A A A A A A
1 1 2 4 2 3
8 8 8 4 8 3
8 9 5 0 9 7
Assembly of Cableform *
M.S.A.-Input PCB
NOTE:
*Items required in Kit.
PLG-5 FROM
MASTER/
SLAVE
PLG-7
ADAPTER
+24V 0V PCB
RADAR 1
SKE
VIDEO 1 (CO-AX*) BUFFER AMP
VID 1
RAN-A23/*
or SKF
SYNC 1 (CO-AX*) RAN-A29/*
SYNC 1
VIDEO 1
TO USER
RADAR
SYNC 1
PLG-6 FROM
MASTER/
SLAVE
PLG-8
ADAPTER
+24V 0V
RADAR 2 PCB
SKG
VIDEO 2 (CO-AX*) BUFFER AMP VID 2
RAN-A23/*
or SKH
SYNC 2 (CO-AX*)
RAN-A29/* SYNC 2
MASTER/SLAVE
VIDEO 2 INTERFACE PCB
TO USER
RADAR
SYNC 2
CD-2526
VIDEO
In-line
Connector
38-CORE CABLE SYNC
FROM RADAR 1 (MASTER)
CABLE FORM HRC-A341 INPUT/OUTPUT PCB
MASTER/SLAVE ADAPTER PCB (HRC - A288) OR 38-CORE CABLE
FROM Mk 5
TX ONLY PLG PLE PLW
1 1 ANTENNA +24V G & Bn 1
2 2 2
3 3 0V Y&V 3
4 4 4
5 5 MOD +27V R&O 5
6 6 6
7 7 MOD 0V B&P 7
8 8 8
9 9 +12V
R/Bk 9
10 10 -12V Bn/Bk 10
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V W 11
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V Bk 12
PLD
1
2 Video
3
NOTE: IF OTHER INTERFACES 4 LOW RATIO GYRO Sync
FIT CABLEFORM
ARE ALSO USED, REFER TO 5
HRC-A388 ONLY IF COMPASS PCB (HRC - A107)
6
THE APPROPRIATE FIGURE HEADING LINE (1)
7 LOW RATIO PCB
0 VOLTS IS FITTED.
FOR RADAR CONNECTIONS. AZIMUTH (1) 8
9 TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED
0 VOLTS
IN BOX FOR SPLIT SYSTEM PLU
10 1 G/B
10 DIRECTION 1
LOW RATIO 2 11 S/B PULSES 2
PLC OUTPUT 3
1 4
2 5
3 6
4 COMPASS INPUT FROM LOG 7
5 COMPASS REPEATER PLA INPUT 8
6 S1 1
7 S2 2
8 S3 3
9 REF1 4
10 LINK PERMANENTLY REF2 5
FITTED 6
PLP PLF
+12V 1 1
+24V 2 2
0V 3 3 FLYING
-12V 4 4 LEADS
5 5
+5V
6 6
RUN
7 7
RADAR 1 8
4096 AZIMUTH 8
9 9
10 10
CD-2319
7 7 MOD 0V B&P
7
VIDEO 2
SKF
FROM RADAR 2 9 9 +12V R/Bk 9
SYNC 2 10 10 -12V Bn/Bk 10
SKH
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V W 11
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V Bk 12
TB7A
PLD
FROM RADAR 2
TB5A
FLYING LEAD
PLC
6 STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR STEPPER.
FLYING LEADS 7 SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
STEPPER CONNECTS TO 4 WIRES (1-4).
PINS 1, 2 & 3 ARE PHASES.
LINK PERMANENTLY PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
SKA PLA FITTED PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
1 0V
PLU
1
FLYING LEAD
2 +5V 1
2
3 2
3
4 -15V COMPASS INPUT 3
4
5 +15V 4
5
6 4096 5
6
PLP PLF 6
+12V 1 LOG INPUT 7
1 8
+24V 2
2
0V 3
3
-12V 4
FLYING LEADS 4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
RADAR 1 7 6
4096 AZIMUTH 8 7
8 3 COAX CABLES HRC-A347
OR 2 IN THE 38-CORE CABLE + 1 EXTRA
OUTPUTS
BLANK
SKF1 SKK
VIDEO
SKG1 SKJ
SYNC
SKH1 SKH
CD-2320
FOR Mk 5
TX ONLY
HL PLA PLB PLV
1 1 1 TX RUN S
0V 2 TB5A 2 2 TX MUTE R/G
1
2
3 3 MED PULSE B/Y
FROM RADAR 2 3
AZ 4 4 LONG PULSE B/W
1 4
TB7B 5 5 TUNE CONTROL R/Y
0V 2 5
6 6 TUNE INDICATOR R/W
7 T 6
7 TX READY
7
90/180 AZIMUTH 8
4096 AZIMUTH 9 9 4096 AZIMUTH G/O
9
10 10 RX MON B/Bk
PLA 11 11 HEADING LINE G/W
10
11
0V 1 12 12 TX MON (L) B/O
2 WIRES TO 13 TX MON (N) G/Y 12
+5V 2 13
PIN 14 14 0V R/B 13
USED ONLY WITH 3 14
MASTER/SLAVE 14
-15V 4
SYNCHRO OR +15V 5 NOTE: TX MON
2 C0AX AND 3 OR
DIVIDE BY 4 PCB 4096 6 CONNECTIONS ONLY
4-CORE CABLE FROM
RADAR 1 (SLAVE) REQUIRED WITH
EARLY Mk4 & Mk3
TRANSMITTERS
TB2A PLD
22 HEADING LINE (1) 6
23 0V 7
24 AZIMUTH (1) 8
25 0V 9
CABLEFORM
HRC-A342
STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR STEPPER.
SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
STEPPER CONNECTS TO 4 WIRES (1-4).
PINS 1, 2 & 3 ARE PHASES.
PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
PLC PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
PLU
6
FLYING LEADS 7 1
COMPASS INPUT 2
3
LINK PERMANENTLY 4
FITTED 5
6
LOG INPUT 7
PLP PLF 8
+12V 1
1
+24V 2
2
3
FLYING LEADS
0V 3
-12V 4
4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
6
RADAR 1 7
7
4096 AZIMUTH 8
8
7 7 MOD 0V B&P 7
VIDEO 2 SKF
DIVIDE BY 4 (CDY-A297)
12 B/O
13 TX MON (N) 12
13 G/Y
AZ 1 14 14 0V 13
R/B
14
2
HL 3 TWO WIRES
4 TO PIN 14
TB2
AZ
HL PLC
6
FLYING LEADS STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR STEPPER.
7
SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
STEPPER CONNECTS TO 4 WIRES (1-4).
PINS 1, 2 & 3 ARE PHASES.
LINK PERMANENTLY PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
SKA PLA FITTED PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
1 0V
PLU
1
FLYING LEAD
2 +5V 1
2
3 2
3
4 -15V COMPASS INPUT 3
4
5 +15V 4
5
6 4096 5
6
PLP PLF 6
+12V 1 LOG INPUT 7
1 8
+24V 2
FLYING LEADS
2
0V 3
3
-12V 4
4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
6
RADAR 1 7
7
4096 AZIMUTH 8
8 3 COAX CABLES HRC-A347
OR 2 IN THE 38-CORE CABLE + 1 EXTRA
OUTPUTS
BLANK
SKF1 SKK
VIDEO
SKG1 SKJ
SYNC
SKH1 SKH
CD-2322
CHAPTER 8A
ANNEX A
SERIAL AND NMEA COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS
SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT Serial Received Data
This document describes the input/output PCBs The serial received data (Receive data #1, #2, #3 and #4)
(NNR-A910, for series 6000 and 7000 displays and can be either RS232 or RS422. Connections are via
NNR-A996 for series 5000 displays) of the Nucleus 3 sockets PLF and PLG with pinouts as specified below.
series of Radar Displays.
PLF (Serial 1 & 2)
NOTE:
The input/output PCB (NNR-A996) used in the 5000 series
displays is functionally equivalent to the input/output PCB Pin Description
(NNR-A910) used in the 6000/7000 series displays, but is
mechanically different. I/O PCB (NNR-A996) fits 1 Transmit Data #1 output - RS232
internally and requires external connector access. Socket
connectors are provided at the top and bottom of the PCB 2 Receive Data #1 input A - RS232 data or
for this purpose. RS422 +
3 Local GND
GENERAL PURPOSE SERIAL INPUTS 4 +12V
5 +5V
The I/O PCBs have four general purpose RS232/RS422 6 Receive Data #1 input B - RS232 gnd or
inputs; serial 1, 2, 3 and 4, three RS232 outputs and one RS422 -
RS422 output. The inputs are opto-isolated, in accordance Transmit Data #2 output - RS232
7
with IEC 1162 series specifications.
8 Receive Data #2 input A - RS232 data or
RS422 +
The inputs/outputs are primarily for NMEA ship's sensor
inputs and inputs from external equipment (e.g. ECDIS, 9 Local GND
GPS, Depth indicators, etc.). A general purpose CTS 10 +12V
(Clear to Send) input is also provided for use by "slow" 11 +5V
external devices (e.g. a line printer). The implementation 12 Receive Data #2 input B - RS232 gnd or
and use of this is target device and software dependent. RS422 -
13 CTS input - signal
14 CTS input - gnd
Pin Description
1 Transmit Data #3 output - RS232
2 Receive Data #3 input A - RS232 data or
RS422 +
3 Local GND
4 +12V
5 +5V
6 Receive Data #3 input B - RS232 gnd or
RS422 -
7 Transmit Data #4 output A - RS232
8 RS232 Receive Data #4 input A - RS232
data or RS422 +
9 Local GND
10 +12V
11 +5V
12 Receive Data #4 input B - RS232 gnd or
RS422 -
13 Transmit Data #4 output B - RS422 -
14 Local GND
Listener Input
Impedence > 3K 5K
MAX232
CD-0227
470R
SFH6156-2
Listener Input
Impedence > 500R
CD-6010
+5V
400kW MAX
238
TTL In RS232
Data Out
CD-2387
For example:
Two or more GPS' may be connected to Ports 1 & 2 and
an ECDIS may also be supplying position data, via GGA
message (Port 4). If ECDIS sourced position data is the
preferred choice, then set Port 4 priority to a high number,
the next choice to a lower number and the back up (third
choice) to the lowest value.
Each Port can have a different Baud rate to allow for non
NMEA inputs. The range is from 1200 to 38400 baud.
$ALR - Set Alarm Rate I.M.O. Ref. A224 (VII). Water depth relative to the
Local alarm condition and status. This sentence is used to transducer and offset of the measuring transducer.
report an alarm condition on a device and its current state Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the
of acknowledgement. transducer to the waterline. Negative offset numbers
provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the
$--ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF> keel of interest.
$BWC
This message type is not used.
$BWR
This message type is not used.
$BWW
This message type is not used.
$DBT
This message type is not used.
Checksum
Differential reference station ID 0000-1023
Age of differential GPS data2
Units of geoidal separation M=metres
Geoidal separation
Units of antenna altitude M=metres
Antenna altitude above/below mean-sea-level (geoid)
Horizontal dilution of precision
Number of satellites in use: 00-12, may be different from number of satellites
in view
GPS quality indicator
Longitude cardinal, E=East, W=West
Longitude
Latitude Cardinal, N=North, S=South
Longitude
UTC of position
NOTES:
1. If a GGA message is received from the same
sensor as a GLL message, the GGA message is taken in
preference to the GLL message.
2. If a position sensor is lost for any reason, the
position will "time-out" after 20 seconds and the position
sensor in use is set to zero (no sensor) allowing any sensor
to provide position information.
$HDT
Latitude and Longitude of present vessel position, time of
position fix and status. Message Port Maximum Minimum
Type Message message
$GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF> frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1Hz 0.2 Hz
Checksum
Mode indicator
Status: A = Data True heading of Ownship in degrees.
valid
UTC of position $HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
Longitude cardinal, E=East,
W=West
Longitude Checksum
Latitude cardinal, N=North, S=South Degrees = True
Latitude Heading (degrees)
message description.
$RNN: Route message (NMEA version 1.5 compliant)
Checksum
speed units K,N,S Way point identifiers, listed in order with starting Way point
vessel drift (speed) first for route number nn .
(manually entered)
vessel set, degrees true $XxRnn,cc,cc,cc*hh<CR><LF>
(manually entered)
speed reference - see Note
vessel speed Checksum
course reference - see Note 14 field sequence of route Way
vessel course, degrees true point Ids
heading status, A= valid nn=Route number
heading, degrees true
NOTE:
It is important to decide on one message type (e.g. RTE or
Rnn) and disable the other type from the NMEA setup
NOTE: menu, to avoid possible conflict. If the radar is displaying
an RTE, receipt of an Rnn message from any source will
Course/speed reference refers to the stab source currently corrupt the route. If the radar is displaying an Rnn, receipt
selected of an RTE message from any source will corrupt the route.
message description
$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Display rotation - see note 1
Range units K/N/S
Range scale in use
Cursor bearing degrees clockwise from zero degrees
Cursor range from Ownship
EBL 2 degrees
VRM 2 range
Origin 2 bearing - see note 2
Origin 2 range - see note 2
Bearing line 1 (EBL1) degrees from 0
Variable range marker 1 (VRM 1) range
Origin 1 bearing degrees from 0 - see note 2
Origin 1 range from ownship - see note 2
NOTE:
1) Display rotation: C = Course-up, course-over-ground
up, degrees True.
H = Head-up, ships heading
(centre-line) 0 degrees up.
N = North-up, True north is 0 deg
up.
$RTE
Message Port Maximum Minimum
Type Message message
frequency frequency
Talker 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1Hz 0.2Hz
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c, .........c--c*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Way point n identifier - see Note 1
Additional Way point identifiers - see Note 1
Way point identifier
Route identifier
Message Mode: C =Complete route, all Way points.
W = Working route, 1st listed Way point is FROM
2nd is TO
Remainder are the rest of the route.
Message number - see Note 2.
Total number of messages being transmitted - see Note 2.
NOTE:
1 A variable number of Way point identifiers, up to n, may be included within the limits of allowed sentence length. As
there are no specific number of Way points, null fields are not required for Way point identifier fields.
2 A single route may require the transmission of multiple messages. The first field specifies the total number of messages,
minimum value = 1. The second field identifies the order of the message (message number), minimum value = 1.
NOTE:
It is important to decide on one message type (e.g. RTE or
Rnn) and disable the other type from the NMEA setup
menu, to avoid possible conflict. If the radar is displaying
an RTE, receipt of an Rnn message from any source will
corrupt the route. If the radar is displaying an Rnn, receipt
of an RTE message from any source will corrupt the route.
$SFI
This message type is not used.
$STN
This message type is not used.
$TLL
This message type is not used.
$TRF
This message type is not used.
message description
T = tracking
$VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Status: Stern ground speed, A = Data valid, V= Data invalid
Stern transverse water speed1, knots
Status: Stern water speed, A= Data valid, V = Data invalid
Stern transverse water speed1, knots
Status: Ground speed, A = Data valid, V = Data invalid
Transverse ground speed1, knots
Longitudinal ground speed1, knots
Status: Water speed, A = Data valid
Transverse water speed1, knots
Longitudinal water speed1, knots
$VDR
This message type is not used.
$VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
Km/h
Speed km/h
Knots
Speed, knots
Magnetic
Heading, degrees Magnetic
True
Heading, degrees True.
$VLW
This message type is not used.
$VPW
This message type is not used.
$VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.
Checksum
Mode Indicator $-DA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
Speed Units: K=km/h
Speed
Speed Units: N=knots Checksum
Speed Local zone minutes
degrees Magnetic description, same sign
COG as local hours
degrees True Local zone description1,
COG 00 to +/-13 hours
Year
1) Positioning system Mode indicator Month: 01 to 12
A = Autonomous mode Day: 01 to 31
D = Differential mode UTC
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
M = Manual input mode 1) Zone description is the number of whole hours added to
S = Simulator mode local time to obtain GMT, Zone description is negative for
N = Data not valid East longitudes.
The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a
null field $ZDL
This message type is not used.
$WNC
This message type is not used. $ZFO
This message type is not used.
$WPL Way point Location
$ZTG
Message Port Maximum Minimum
This message type is not used.
Type Message message
frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A Once only per
$ZZU: UTC Time (NMEA version 2.00 compliant)
way point
Message Port Maximum Minimum
Type Message message
Latitude and longitude of specified Way point. frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3,A 4A 1 Hz 0.1 Hz
$WPL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,cc*hh<CR><LF>
Time. UTC
Checksum
Way point Identifier $ZZU,hhmmss.ss*hh<CR><LF>
E/W
Way point longitude
N/S UTC
Way point latitude
QUERY ADDRESS FIELDS
The Nucleus 3 does not support the use of the query
$XDR address field (section 5.2.1.2 IEC 1162) and will not
This message type is not used. respond to this message format.
CHAPTER 8B
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
411.5
66.5 280
CABLE ENTRIES
BASE
CD-2364
COMMISSIONING Potentiometers
9 The following Table 2 gives a list and description of
INTRODUCTION Potentiometers.
5 The Interswitch Unit has two rotary switches S1, Table 2 Interswitch Unit Potentiometers
CROSSED/UNCROSSED and S2, STATUS, refer
to Figure 2. The combinations offered by the interswitch
configuration are as follows:
POT DESCRIPTION
(1) A Transceiver to A Display.
B Transceiver to B Display
RV1 NOT USED
(2) A Transceiver to B Display.
B Transceiver to A Display RV2 NOT USED
(3) A Transceiver to A Display as MASTER with B RV3 NOT USED
Display as SLAVE.
RV4 NOT USED
(4) A Transceiver to B Display as MASTER with A
Display as SLAVE. RV5* Display A - Video amplitude
(5) B Transceiver to A Display as MASTER with B RV6* Display B - Video amplitude
Display as SLAVE.
(6) B Transceiver to B Display as MASTER with A
*NOTE:
Display as SLAVE.
RV5 and RV6 are factory preset and should not need to be
adjusted.
CONTROL SWITCHES (FIGURE 2)
6 The two switches, located on the Front Panel of the LINK SETTINGS ON INSTALLATION
Unit, are used for configuration control. The
configurations are annotated pictorially in relation to each 10 The links are set as follows:
switch position.
Sync Delay Links LK3, LK4, LK5 and LK6 - Set to 0
on installation and then adjusted in Setting to Work.
OPERATION
7 The unit operates as described later in this Chapter.
The configuration combinations are shown in Figure
2b.
Link Settings
8 The following Table 1 gives a list and description of
links in the unit.
LINK DESCRIPTION
A A
A A
1 B
B B
2
A A
B B
A A 5 3
4
B B
TEST A
B B
REMOTE
INTERSWITCH
CD-2362
18 Two switches are located on the top face of the Relay Banks
Interface Unit, refer to Figure 2b. The switches:
Transmitter Control Selector and Display Control Selector, 23 Three banks of relays are utilised as the switching
control the following functions: elements that set the various signal routes through the
(1) Transmitter Control Selector - determines which PCB. All relays are powered from the +26V dc supply and are
driven by appropriate signals produced by the Switching
Display controls which Transmitter when in Local
Control Circuit.
mode.
(2) Display Control Selector - A four-position switch 24 The three banks of relays are listed below:
that determines the interswitch mode and (1) Signal Switching Relays - this bank of relays
connections in one of the Local positions switches all control and data signals between the
19 The Transmitter Control Selector is operative only if system Displays and Tr ansmitt ers. T he
the Display Control Selector is in Positions 1 to 3. The de-energised state is when Display A is connected
switch may then be used to set which Display is master of to Transmitter A and Display B is connected to
which Transmitter. The Display Control Selector has five Transmitter B.
positions:
(2) Display A Relays - this bank of relays switches
(1) Slaved off Transmitter A. Azimuth data, Heading Line, Sync pulse and
(2) Both Displays are Masters. Video pulse inputs from Transmitter A or B
through to Display A. The de-energised state
(3) Slaved off Transmitter B.
connects Transmitter A to Display A.
(4) Remote.
(3) Display B Relays - this bank of relays switches
(5) Test. Azimuth data, Heading Line, Sync pulse and
Video pulse inputs from Transmitter A or B
through to Display B. The de-energised state
connects Transmitter B to Display B.
Line 1 Local = 0, Remote = 1 Position 2 - MASTER; if set to this position the mode
Line 2 Straight = 0, Crossed = 1 of operation is as set by the Transmitter Control
Selector.
30 Inputs to each Display with Input data selector = 12V &
Remote Position 3 - SLAVE B; both Displays are connected to
Transmitter B. If the Transmitter Control Selector
0,0 = Other Tx is OFF switch is in the UNCROSSED position then Display B
0,1 = Other Tx is STANDBY but NOT READY controls Transmitter B, if in the CROSSED position
1,0 = Other Tx is STANDBY and READY then Display A controls Transmitter B.
1,1 = Other Tx is RUNNING
31 Inputs to each Display with Input data selector = 12V & CAUTION
Local
Before selecting REMOTE ensure that the
Line 1 Master = 0, Slave = 1 Display(s) is/are switched to STANDBY.
Line 2 Connected to Own = 0, Other = 1
Position 4 - REMOTE; on power up the system is
Sync Pulse Circuit connected as previously configured before power was
turned off. Each display retains its configuration and
32 A Sync Pulse Circuit, comprising a presetable Delay the first display switched on determines the initial state.
Line and associated Buffer, is provided for each
Transmitter.
Position 5 - TEST; used for Fault Finding purposes
33 Transmitter SYNC pulses are delayed by up to 350ns only, isolates most of the Interswitch circuits so that
through a Sync Delay Line, and then passed to a Straight Through operation only is selected.
Buffer. The buffered SYNC pulses are then passed via the
Display A or B Relays and subsequently split to provide a
SYNC pulse to the selected Display, and a BLANK pulse to
the other Display (if required).
CD-2325
CD-4667
DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE
START
CHECK OPERATION
OF FRONT PANEL
CONTROL SWITCHES
NO REPLACE
SWITCHES OK?
SWITCH(ES
YES
NO REPAIR/REPLACE
WIRING OK?
WIRING
YES
CHECK SECURITY
& OPERATION OF
PCB-MOUNTED RELAYS
NO RE-SEAT/REPLACE
RELAYS OK? RELAY(S)
AS NECESSARY
YES
REPLACE DUAL
INTERSWITCH PCB
CD-2357
PARTS
PLCON
1 6
PLDA-2 PLDB-2
PLTA-2 PLTB-2
1 1 1 1
RL4
RL6
RL16
RL5
RL11
RL15
RL7
RL10
14 14 14 14
RL19
RV3
RV2
RV1
10 10 10 10
1 1 1 1
RL2
RL3
FS1 FS2
12 12 12 12
LK4
DASYNC DABLANK
TASYNC
TAVIDEO SK4
SK5 SK6 LK5
RV6
DAVIDEO DBVIDEO
SK7 TBVIDEO
RV5
PL18
CD-2418
Figure 5b - Dual Interswitch Unit PCB - Links, Potentiometers & Switch Positions
CHAPTER 8C
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
1 This Chapter provides information on Nucleus 3 7000 6 Typical Flat Screen Display system configurations are
Flat Panel Display equipment. shown in the Introduction to this Manual. Refer to the
Introduction, paragraph 43, for further information.
2 Two types of Nucleus 3 7000 Flat Panel Displays are
available, these are:
(1) Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Display (NNR-A69) PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
(2) Nucleus 7000 18-inch Display (NNR-A70)
3 T he Nucleus 7000 F lat Panel Dis plays 7 Prior to installation of the Flat Panel Display,
(NNR-A69/NNR-A70) are designed to be connected to implement the following:
a Nucleus 3 Split Processor unit, in conjunction with a
(1) Ensure that there is adequate clearance for the
Remote Trackerball and a Display ON-OFF Sounder, as an
alternative to the Nucleus 6000 Display. Operators position in front of the desk or pedestal
display unit and at the rear of the unit to allow fitting
4 The Flat Panel Display systems comprise the following of the power and other system cables.
assemblies:
(2) Lay in the ships cables to the required installation
(1) Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel Display. position.
(2) Split Processor - containing Input/Output PCB,
System PCB and Power Supply Unit.
(3) Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod).
(4) Display On-Off Sounder Unit.
DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
5 The Characteristics of the Flat Panel Displays are
detailed below.
.
Weight 10.2 kg -
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
8 The dimensions of equipment are shown in Figure 1c 17 Refer to Figure 1c for installation of the 20.1-inch Flat
and Figure 2c. Adequate clearance at the front of the Panel Display and Figure 2c for installation of the
equipment must be maintained for access and servicing. 18-inch Flat Panel Display.
18 Mark out the the cut-out position for the Flat Panel
Position of the Display Display in the Panel or Console (as appropriate),
allowing sufficient space for cable access and ventilation,
9 The Nucleus 3 7000 Flat Panel Display is designed to and cut-out the aperture for the flat panel display.
be Panel or Console mounted, allowing easy access
for the Operator. 19 Cut out the aperture for the Flat Panel Display and drill
the required bolt positions for fixings.
Specifications 20 Fit the Flat Panel Display into the Panel/Console and
secure it in position, using the fixings supplied.
10 For details of the Weight, Power Supplies and
Compass Safe distances of the Flat Panel Displays, Processor Unit
refer to Table 1.
21 Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable access and
servicing.
Cable Screens 22 Drill the required bolt positions and secure the
Processor unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
11 The cable screens are not to be stripped back further
than is necessary to enable the cores to be connected. 23 Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and
All exposed screens must be covered with PVC sleeving to make the connections, as detailed in the appropriate
prevent accidental contact with live terminals. Interconnections diagram. Figure 3c - 20.1-inch Display or
Figure 4c - 18-inch Display.
Cable Connections
On/Off Sounder Unit
12 The Flat Panel Display and associated Remote
Trackerball and On/Off Sounder are connected to the 24 Where the On/Off Sounder is to be panel mounted,
processor as shown on Figure 1c and Figure 2c. refer to Figure 5c and mark out the position of the
On/Off Sounder unit. Drill the required fixing positions and
secure the unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
INPUT SIGNALS
25 Connect the On/Off Sounder unit to the Processor
13 Inputs to the Flat Screen Displays comprise video Unit, as detailed in the appropriate interconnections
signals and power. diagram.
14 The control switches, located on the Front Panel of the 26 Where the Remote Trackerball is to be mounted within
Flat Panel Display Unit, are used for positioning the a console, refer to Figure 6c and mark out the position
picture on the screen and configuring the picture of the Trackerball unit. Drill the required fixing positions and
parameters. secure the unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
15 Refer to paragraphs 58 to 83, for details of the Controls 27 Connect the Remote Trackerball to the Processor
and indications provided at the Flat Panel Display Unit, as detailed in the appropriate interconnections
units. diagram.
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 ON
5 OFF
6 ON
7 OFF
8 OFF
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
81.27 533.8
TO INSTALL THE NUCLEUS 7000
SPLIT PROCESSOR & FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
A) DISPLAY UNIT
1. Refer to the dimensioned drawing opposite for hole locations.
Mark out the the cut-out position for the Flat Panel Display in the Panel or
Console (as appropriate), allowing sufficient space for cable access and ventilation.
Cut out the aperture for the Flat Panel Display and drill the required bolt positions for fixings.
437.77
390.5
2. Fit the Display Unit in the required location and fasten in position using the fixings supplied.
480.5
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional 5, 10, 15 & 20m kits also available.
1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving sufficient clearance for ventilation,
cable access and servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the diagram.
CONT BRIGHT
FRONT VIEW 3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and make the connections as detailed
SIDE VIEW
on the appropriate Connections Diagram(s).
METRIC THREAD M6 x 1
19
5. See Monitor to Processor Connections Diagram
447.07
379.96
394.66
BOTTOM VIEW
NUCLEUS SPLIT PROCESSOR
NOT TO SCALE NOTE: OPTIONAL HANDLES MAY BE FITTED AS SHOWN (NNR-A59) ARPA NUCLEUS 7000 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
487.80 (NNR-A60) ATA SYSTEM
503
(NNR-A61) EPA
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY NNR-A69 (20.1-INCH) VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE 2
V/H GND 2
LK2 H OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
FLAT PANEL MONITOR (NNR-A69) AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 0%: -15C TO +55C
OPEN CLOSED
BNC MONITOR CABLE
AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 95%: +40C
SKD (NNR-A995)
RED 1
GREEN 2
BLUE 3
GND 4
DDC RETURN 5
GND-R 6
GND-G 7
GND-B 8
TO BNC CONNECTORS
POWER CONSUMPTION: 380VA
RESERVED 9
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER 10
GND 11
DDR DATA 12
H-SYNC 13
V-SYNC 14
530 ref
DDC CLOCK 15
570
Figure 1c - Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Installation Diagram Figure 1c
45.72
61.47 358.90 (ACTIVE AREA)
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional 5, 10, 15 & 20m kits also available.
1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving sufficient clearance for ventilation,
cable access and servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the diagram.
287.02
2. Secure the Processor Unit in position.
399.5
324
3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and make the connections as detailed
on the appropriate Connections Diagram(s).
4. Ensure that the Processor Unit is directly earthed to the ship's earth, using the bolt provided.
77.47
UP
MENU
DOWN
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY NNR-A70 (18-INCH) VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE
V/H GND 2 2
LK2 H
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
FLAT PANEL MONITOR (NNR-A70)
OPEN CLOSED
SVGACABLE AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 0%: -15C TO +55C
SKD (NNR-A988) SKJ2
AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 95%: +40C
RED 1 RED VIDEO
GREEN 2 GREEN VIDEO
BLUE 3 BLUE VIDEO
GND 4 GND
DDC RETURN 5 NO CONNECTION
GND-R 6 GND R
GND-G 7 GND G
GND-B 8 GND B
RESERVED 9 NO CONNECTION
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER
GND
10
11
GND
GND
POWER CONSUMPTION: 380VA
DDR DATA 12 SDA
H-SYNC 13 HORIZONTAL SYNC
V-SYNC 14 VERTICAL SYNC
DDC CLOCK 15 NO CONNECTION
530 ref
570
+24V dc 1
PLR
RED
PLJ1
1 +24V dc
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY: 10.2kg
BLUE
GND 2 2 +24V dc
RTN
280 ref L L
OUTPUT POWER CABLE (3 CORE) INPUT
TERMINALS N N TERMINALS
230 420
E E
(NNR-A61) EPA NNR-A988, NNR-A989 AND NNR-A992 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A991 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A70.
NNR-A530 IS INCLUDED WITH NNR-A10-3.
CD-4333
Figure 2c - Nucleus 7000 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Installation Diagram Figure 2c
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE 2
V/H GND 2
LK2 H
SUPPLY IN
SUPPLY IN/OUT
NOTE:
NNR-A987, NNR-A989, NNR-A993, AND NNR-A995 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A994 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A69.
CD-4331
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE 2
V/H GND 2
LK2 H
SUPPLY IN
SUPPLY IN/OUT
NOTE:
NNR-A988, NNR-A989 AND NNR-A992 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A991 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A70.
CD-4332
60 130
180
1 2
RADAR
ON-OFF
R3 TYP
170
160
TO
VIDEO INPUT
PCB
NNR-A215-1 {
110
VIEW ON REAR OF FRONT COVER
CUT-OUT DETAILS FOR PANEL MOUNTING
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
CD-4307
SKN TB1
Radar Adaptor Push Button PCB
cable form 9-Way D-type Terminal connector
(NNR-A853) (PL1) (SKN)
NNR-A853
CON 2
SW1
SK1
80 CON 1
SW1 SETTINGS
ON: 1, 4, 6* *(6 May not be required, dependant upon connected device)
105
145
30 48
11
147.5
145 187
34
KELVIN HUGHES
4 x O4
116
Software Version.
Serial Number of Software.
Number of Hours unit has been in use.
Number of times that the unit has been switch on.
SETUP PICTURE
46
382
82
1687
39 A B C
USER
100
R 100
54
G 100
B 100
SAVE
PRESETS SAVE
HORIZONTAL POSITION BRIGHTNESS
VIDEO
SAT 48
LPK 0
LSO 0
BLV 0
NORM:
NTSC NTSC 44
PAL SECAM
HPLL
SELECT MENUS BY HIGHLIGHTING WITH THE KEYS VCR TV
[+] (DOWN) AND [-] (UP) AND PRESSING [ENTER]
Chroma Saturation
OPEN MAIN MENU WITH THE [MENU] KEY
SOURCES
MAIN MENU
SETUP Video:
PICTURE RGB1 RGB2
VIDEO
CIN1 S-VIDEO
SOURCES
CIN 2
OPTIONS
MODE INFO
SERVICE
Select Video Source
OPTIONS
PROMPT:
on off
LANGUAGE
deutsch english
francais
OSD: 20 sec.
Hot Key:
Clock Phase
sets PROMPT Mode
87
A facility which has been previously activated, such as
EBL, is re-selected by positioning the cursor in close
proximity to the required facility and pressing the centre
pushbutton.
88 For further operating information, refer to Chapter 1 -
Nucleus 3 Displays - Operating Information.
DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE
NO PICTURE PRESENT
YES YES
CHECK CABLE
IS POLARITY NO NNR-A992 (18-INCH)
REVERSE CONNECTIONS OR
CORRECT?
NNR-A993 (20.1-INCH)
CONNECTIONS
YES
AT SKJ2
OR AT THE BNC NO NO
CONNECTIONS , CHECK SKD ON ARE SIGNALS CHECK PROCESSOR
ARE THE VGA SIGNALS PROCESSOR VIDEO I/P PCB PRESENT? USING RELEVANT CHART
PRESENT?
YES YES
REPLACE
POWER SUPPLY PCB.
IS +12V DC NO
PRESENT ON BOTH? IF FAULT NOT CLEARED,
REPLACE VGA CONVERTER
AND/OR DISPLAY MODULE
YES
CHAPTER 8D
TRANSMITTER INTERFACE UNIT
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION
305
77.5 150
16
12mm DIA (4 OFF)
40
532
500
450
DANGER
High
voltage
CD-4572
13 Refer to Figure 1d and mount the Transmitter 20 Connections between the TIU and the Transmitter
Interface Unit (TIU) in its required location (ensuring require a 38-core cable carrying the following
sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable access and services: Control and Data, Tx/Rx data, Video, Sync and dc
servicing) as follows: power supplies.
(1) Mark out the position of the TIU and drill holes in Interconnections to Nucleus 3 (5000) Display
the required positions for mounting.
21 Connection to a Nucleus 3 (5000) Display requires a
(2) Secure the TIU in position, using suitable bolts. composite 12-core cable carrying the following
services: Control and Data, Tx/Rx data, Video and Sync.
Earthing
Interconnections to Nucleus 3 (6000) Display
14 Ensure that the TIU is earthed correctly, to the ship's
22 Connection to a Nucleus 3 (6000) Display requires a
earth, using the earthing bolt provided.
composite 12-core cable carrying the following
services: Control and Data, Tx/Rx data, Video and Sync.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Cable Screens
15 The cable screens are not to be stripped back further
than is necessary to enable the cores to be connected.
All exposed screens must be covered with PVC sleeving to
prevent accidental contact with live terminals.
Cable Installation
17 Refer to the appropriate interconnections diagram and
connect the cables between the TIU and the
Transmitter and between the TIU and the Nucleus 3 display ,
or RIU (as appropriate).
(1) Feed the Transmitter and Display cables through
the base of the unit and connect to the appropriate
input/output connectors.
18 Secure the cables in position, using the cable clamps
provided at the base of the unit.
19 Instructions for setting to work are provided in the
section on Commissioning, later in this chapter.
LABEL
(NNR-1621)
(45-600-0033-001)
TOP VIEW
CABLEFORM
(NNR-A5020)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
(45-677-124)
CABLEFORM
(NNR-A5021) DANGER
TERMINATE AS FOLLOWS High
SKB TO 45-677-124 PLB voltage
SKC TO NNR-A981 PLC
PLC
A B
PLB
CABLEFORM
(NNR-A5022)
PLA
TERMINATE AS FOLLOWS
SKA TO NNR-A1004 PLA
SKC TO 45-677-124 PLC
N
PLA
MAINS FILTER SKD TO 45-677-124 PLD
LOAD
LINE
(45-680-003)
L
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW A VIEW SHOWN WITH COVER REMOVED FOR CLARITY VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW B VIEW SHOWING COVER DETAILS
CD-4900
UNDERSIDE VIEW
a power On/Off switch on the top of the unit. PLA SL8-CL-V SL3-CL-V
SKE
LK1
L1366
SKH
INDICATORS L1366
LK2
26 The following LED indicators are provided on the CAN
Adapter PCB: SW1 SKD
87123-0601
219-4LPST
27 There are no indicators provided on the TIU Terminals Power Supply Unit
PCB.
31 There are two switches on the Power Supply unit
(45-677-124), which are used to set the required
LINK & SWITCH SETTINGS antenna rotation supply (see Figure 4d ). Set the switches as
follows:
CAN Adapter PCB (NNR-A981)
28 There are two links on the CAN Adapter PCB. The SW1 SW2
links are normally configured as follows: Heater Volts Speed Volts
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1 2
ON
Nucleus 3 systems to control signals for the MkV
transmitter. It also provides the dc power supplies required
by the transmitter.
PLD
35 Typical configuration is shown in Figures 5d and 6d.
36 The Transmitter Interface Unit contains a CAN
Adapter PCB (NNR-A981), a Terminals PCB
(NNR-A1004) and a mains Power Supply Unit (45-677-124).
The CAN Adapter PCB is used to Interface with pre-MkVII
Transmitter/Receivers.
PLC 37 The TIU converts the CAN messages from the
Nucleus 3 displays to control signals for use by the
Transmitter. (In interswitched systems, an RIU is used in
place of a TIU). The Transmitter status signals are passed
back to the the Nucleus 3 Display Input PCB via the CAN
Bus.
38 The TIU is connected to the Mk V Transmitters via
PLE
AZIMUTH
RX MON
HEADING LINE
0V
+15V
-15V
HEATERS +ve
CD-4902 HEATERS -ve Terminals PCB
+27V
Figure 4d - Power Supply Unit (45-677-124): Switch 0V
Positions SCANNER +ve
SCANNER -ve
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 CABLE TIU Mk V
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB
CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX WHITE COAX VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO 3
SKO SKG SKH
GREY COAX GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 2
1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA PLB PLG
BLACK S
CAN HI 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE B/Y
GND 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4
5 RED 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5
6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
+27V 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 G/O
GND 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
12
13
14 R/B
5 0V
TERMINALS PCB
NNR-A1004
PLB
R/Bk
+15V 1 7 +15V
Bn/Bk
-15V 2 4 -15V
W
HEATERS +ve 3 1 HEATERS +ve
Bk
HEATERS -ve 4 2 HEATERS -ve
R
5 1 +27V
O
MODULATOR +27V 6 3 +27V
R/Bn 4 +27V
7
B 2 0V
8
P 5 0V
MODULATOR 0V 9
V/Bk 6 0V
10
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4901
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 CABLE TIU Mk V
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB RIU
NNR-A55 CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6 WHITE COAX VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO 3
OUT IN
SKO SKG SKH
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 2
OUT IN 1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S PLA PLB PLG
BLACK 1 S
CAN HI 1 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE 2 R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE 3 B/Y
GND 3 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4 4
5 RED 5 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5 5
6 6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6 6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
7 7 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 8 G/O
GND 8 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
PLW 10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2 12
13
14 R/B
12 5 0V
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4516
Figure 6d - Display to RIU via TIU to MkV Transmitter: Typical System Configuration
42 The Transmitter Interface Unit (NNR-A66) is fitted with 44 A diagnostic algorithm is shown in Figure 7d, to
an ON/OFF switch on the top of the unit. When set to provide the operator/technician with a step by step
the 1 position the power supply to the unit is switched ON. guide through the fault finding procedure. The algorithm is
intended for identification of faults to LRM level (e.g. A faulty
43 There are no specific operating instructions applicable cable/connector assembly).
to the Transmitter Interface Unit.
START
CHECK OPERATION
OF POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH
YES
IS LED D13
NO FLASHING?
SUSPECT FAULTY
CAN ADAPTER PCB (i.e. PROCESSOR
RUNNING)
YES
NO REPAIR/REPLACE
WIRING OK?
WIRING
YES
REPLACE
CAN ADAPTER PCB
CD-4888
PARTS
CHAPTER 8E
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION
305
77.5 150
16
12 DIA
FIXING HOLES
40
530
500
450
DANGER
High
voltage
MOUNTING BRACKET
CZZ-1121
VIEW SHOWING COVER DETAILS
CD-4571
11 Refer to Figure 1e and mount the Radar Interswitch 18 Connection t o a MkIV Upmast T ransceiv er
Unit (RIU) in its required location, ensuring sufficient (CAE-A12-20) requires a 38-core cable carrying the
clearance for ventilation, cable access and servicing, as following services: Video and Sync, and Control and Data
follows: signals, via the optional CAN Adapter PCB.
(1) Mark out the position of the RIU and drill holes in Interconnections to Mk V Transceiver
the required positions for mounting.
19 Connection to a MkV Transceiver (CAE-A30-7 and
(2) Secure the RIU in position, using suitable bolts. CAE-30-8) requires the use of a Transmitter Interface
Unit (NNR-A66), fitted with a CAN Adapter PCB (NNR-A981)
Earthing and a Terminals PCB (NNR-A1004). Connections to the
Transmitter Interface Unit (TIU) require a composite 12-core
12 Ensure that the RIU is earthed correctly, to the ship's cable carrying the following services: Control and Data, and
earth, using the earthing bolt provided. Video and Sync.
20 Connections between the TIU and the Transmitter
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS require a 38-core cable carrying the following
services: Control and Data, Tx/Rx data, Video and Sync.
Cable Screens Interconnections to a MkVI Transceiver
13 The cable screens are not to be stripped back further 21 Connection to a MkVI Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45)
than is necessary to enable the cores to be connected. requires the use of a Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2).
All exposed screens must be covered with PVC sleeving to Connections to the Soft Start Unit require 38-core cable
prevent accidental contact with live terminals. carrying the following services: Video and Sync, and Control
and Data signals, via the optional CAN Adapter PCB.
Access for Cabling
22 Connections between the Soft Start Unit and the
14 Access to the RIU Processor PCB and the Video Sync Transmitter require a 38-core cable carrying the
Switching Board is obtained by removing the RIU Front following services: Power, Video and Sync, and Control and
Panel. Cables are fed through cable clamps fitted to the base Data signals.
of the casing. Refer to Figure 2e for unit Locations.
Interconnections to a MkVII S-Band Transceiver
NOTE:
23 Connection to a MkVII S-Band Transceiver (CTX-A9)
Access to the inside of the RIU is via the front panel, which requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
is secured in position by six screws. following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
24 Connections to the associated Turning Mechanism
Cable Installation require a 12-core cable.
15 Refer to the appropriate interconnections diagram and In ter con nec tions to a MkVII X-Band Low Speed
connect the cables between the RIU and the Nucleus 3 Transceiver
display and between the RIU and the Transmitter, or TIU (as 25 Connection to a MkVII X-Band Transceiver (CTX-A8)
appropriate). requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
(1) Feed the Transmitter and Display cables through following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
the base of the unit and connect to the appropriate 26 Connections to the associated Low Speed Turning
input/output connectors. Mechanism require a 12-core cable.
16 Secure the cables in position, using the cable clamps
provided at the base of the unit. In ter con nec tions to a MkVII X-Band High Speed
Transceiver
17 Instructions for setting to work are provided in the
section on Commissioning, later in this chapter. 27 Connection to a MkVII X-Band Transceiver (CTX-A8)
requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
28 Connections to the associated High Speed Turning
Mechanism require a 25-core cable.
COMMISSIONING Switches
36 There are two switches on the Processor PCB. The
31 The Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55) is fitted with a switch settings are as follows:
power On/Off switch on the top of the unit.
32 There is no specific commissioning procedure
applicable to the Radar Interswitch Unit. SW1 Description Normal
Position
LED Indication
NOTE:
D37 +27V Present The terminator is only required when each leg is not
connected to both a display and a transceiver. E.g. In a
D38 +5V Present (i.e. RIU is operating normally system comprising 3 transceivers and 2 displays; both a
and backup has not been selected) display and a transceiver are connected to legs 1 and 2, but
D39 Flashes to indicate that processor is running. only a transceiver is connected to leg 3. For this
configuration, the CAN terminator for Display 3/Tx 3 is set
D40 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 1 to ON.
D41 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 2
D42 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 3
SW2 Description Normal
D46 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 4 Position
D47 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 5
1 Tx Power always ON ON
D48 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 6
2 Spare OFF
3 OP5 slaved to Display No. LSB OFF
Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979)
4 OP5 slaved to Display No. OFF
34 There are no indicators provided on the Video/Sync 5 OP5 slaved to Display No. MSB OFF
Switching PCB.
6 OP6 slaved to Display No. LSB OFF
NOTE:
Links 2 and 3 are only removed if a 4096 pulse input is
being used.
LABEL
ON/OFF SWITCH NNR-1620
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
45-600-0033-001 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
GRADE I
SER.N o
CODE.N o NNR-A55
GRADE II EQUIPMENT CLASS B
DISSIPATION MASS Kg
MANUFACTURED BY KELVIN HUGHES LTD HAINAULT ENGLAND
A DIVISION OF SMITHS INDUSTRIES AEROSPACE
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MOUNTING BRACKET
CZZ-1121 (IN 4 POSITIONS)
CABLEFORM
NNR-A5018
PL2 PLW
PLA
PLL
SK7 SK1
PL1 PLT PLU PLV
X X
SK8 SK2
PLM
PLB
X X NNR-A5019 TERMINATED BETWEEN
SK9 SK3 NNR-A979 PL2 & NNR-A980 PLW
SK10 SK4
A B
PLG
PLN
PLC
SK11 SK5
DANGER
SK12 SK6 High
voltage
X X RIU PROCESSOR PCB
PLH
PLD
PLP
SK19 SK13
VIDEO SYNC SWITCHING BOARD NNR-A980
NNR-A979
SK20 SK14
PLR
PLE
SK21 SK15
PLJ
SK22 SK16
X
SK23 SK17 TERMINAL BLOCK
PLS
PLK
PLF
45-718-5135 (6 WAY)
SK24 SK18 X X
1 TB1 6
LABEL
CZZ-1128
VIEWS SHOWN WITH COVER REMOVED FOR CLARITY VIEW SHOWING COVER DETAILS
CD-4569
UNDERSIDE VIEW
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER SOFT START UNIT
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A9
INPUT PCB CZZ-A14
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1 TB1
OUT IN
SKO 1
SK19 - 24 SK13 - 18 3 PHASE 2
GREY COAX SYNC SYNC MAINS
SYNC SYNC 1 3
OUT IN
SW1 (+27V) 1 Bn 1
PLW 1
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 V 2
2
+24V 1 3
(MOTOR) 2 3 3 PHASE
2PLB MAINS
3SKM
Bk
12 1 9SKA
ON/OFF +27V 6
2 R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
Y 7
FILTER HEADING LINE 4
W 8
0V 5
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE L R 1 Tx MON 0V
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY 2 CORE Tx MONITOR
N B 2 Tx MON SIG
MAINS INPUT ARM
E
12 CORE
CABLE
CD-4515
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A8
INPUT PCB
SKP TURNING MECHANISM
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1 CAE-A30-6
OUT IN
SKO 1TB1 1TB1
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 T OR Lt/G
SYNC SYNC 1 5 2
OUT IN S
6
MOTOR 0V
7
8
NOTE 1 O 1
NOTE 1 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-S 3PLX P
2
MOTOR +ve 26V
BLACK 1 1 3
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2 4
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4 3SKK
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 Bn
6 6 MOTOR START (+27V) 1 3
6 V
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB MOTOR START RTN 2 4
7
GREEN 8 8 5
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH 3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
PLW R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
+24V 1 NEON RETURN 2 6
(MOTOR) 2 G
AZIMUTH 3 2
2PLB Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
12 1 0V 5 4
ON/OFF R
2 Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
B
ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
FILTER 12 CORE
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE SMALL
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY 2 CORE L CABLE
MAINS INPUT N
E
CD-4521
Figure 4e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (Low Speed): Typical System Configuration
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER TURNING MECHANISM
NNR-A55 CTX-A8 CAE-A30-5
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK7 - 12 VIDEO VIDEO SK1 - 6
VIDEO VIDEO 1
OUT IN
SKO 1TB1 1TB2
GREY COAX SK19 - 24 SYNC SYNC SK13 - 18 T OR Lt/G
SYNC SYNC 1 5 5
OUT IN B/Bk
S
6 6
B/O
MOTOR 0V
B/Y
NOTE 1 NOTE 1 7 7
G/Y
PLC PLA-F PLL-S 3PLX B/W
BLACK 1 1 8 8
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI G/W
WHITE 2 2 O
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO 1 1
BLUE 3 3 R/W
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4 P
HEADING LINE 4 2 2
RED 5 5 R/Bk
AZIMUTH 5
6 6 MOTOR +ve 36V R/B
6 3 3
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB R/Bn
7
GREEN 8 8 R/Y
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE 4 4
8 AZIMUTH R/G
PLW
3SKK 1TB1
+24V 1
(MOTOR) 2 MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn
2PLB 5
MOTOR START RTN 2 V
6
12 1 3
ON/OFF
2
3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
R
FILTER NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
L G
2 CORE AZIMUTH 3 2
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE N Y
MAINS INPUT HEADING LINE 4 3
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY E W
0V 5 4
R
25 CORE Tx MONITOR B 7 Tx MON 0V
CABLE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
CD-4522
Figure 5e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (High Speed): Typical System Configuration
1
VIDEO IN FROM
D16 PLW TO DISPLAY 1 622-1024ES TRANSMITTER
622-1024ES PLV SK7 PL2 SK1
1-380999-0 1-380999-0
G6H-2F-24V
PLT
PLU
PL1 TP162
RL1
L1366
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
TP4 L1366
PLL
PLA
D19
TP168 TP10 TP2
SK8 SK2
BYW29E-200
TP163
D17 L1366 L1366
TP3 TP1
TP164
1
1
RL2 TP11
B
TP169
LK5
B
G6H-2F-24V SK9 SK3
LK1
BYW29E-200
A
L1366 L1366
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
A
D18
PLM
PLB
D20 TP170 TP165
B
TP6
LK6
TP12
B
SK10 SK4
RL3 TP171
LK2
A
L1366 L1366
A
G6H-2F-24V
BYW29E-200
TP166
1
A LK7 B
TP13
TP7
B
SK11 TP172 SK5
LK3
L1366 L1366
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
A
PLG
PLN
PLC
D21
TP167
TP14 TP8
B
TP173
B
LK8
SK12 R24 SK6
R23
LK4
L1366 L1366
A
BYW29E-200
TP9 TRANSMITTER
TP15
G6H-2F-12V G6H-2F-12V
SK19 TP174 SK13
RL3
L1366 L1366
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
TP22
SL8-CL-V
TP16
PLH
PLD
PLP
D22
TP180 TP175
RL4
SK20 SK14
LK3
L1366 TP17 L1366
TP23
BYW29E-200
TP176
1
219-8LPST 219-6LPST
LK2 LK13
B
B
SK21 TP185 TP18 SK15
SW1
LK15
B A
LK9
M20-9990606
L1366 TP24 L1366
A
A
PL3
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
PLR
PLJ
PLE
TP177
D23
SW2
1
TP19
B
LK14
SK22 SK16
LK10
LK1 TP181
TP25
A
L1366 L1366
A
M20-9990606
1
BYW29E-200
TP182 TP178
TP20
PLZ
1
TP183
B
B
SK23 SK17
LK16
LK11
TP26
L1366 L1366
A
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
PLK
TP179
PLS
PLF
D24
SKX TP21
TP184
B
SK24 SK18
LK17
LK12
87123-0601 TP27
PLY
L1366 L1366
A
1
B2P-SHF-1AA
VIEW ON COMPONENT SIDE
CD-4718 VIEW ON COMPONENT SIDE
CD-4716
Figure 6e - Processor PCB (NNR-A980): Link and Switch Figure 7e - Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979): Link
Positions Positions
Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979)
Links
38 There are seventeen links on the Video/Sync
Switching PCB. The links are configured as follows:
Sync in LK9
Sync out LK15
CD-5049 Video in LK1
Video out LK5
Sync in LK12
Sync out LK17
Video in LK4
Video out LK8
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
START
CHECK OPERATION
OF POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH
YES
IS LED D39
NO FLASHING?
SUSPECT FAULTY
PROCESSOR PCB (i.e. PROCESSOR
RUNNING)
YES
NO REPAIR/REPLACE
WIRING OK?
WIRING
YES
REPLACE PROCESSOR
PCB
CD-4570
PARTS
18 Lower Cable Clamp Bracket NNR-1602-14 34 Rocker Switch 10A 250Vac 45-600-0033-001
Double Pole Type C1250 AP
19 Lower Cable Clamp Bracket NNR-1603-14
CHAPTER 8F
ERGOPOD
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION
1 This Chapter provides information on the Ergopod for INSTALLATION OF ERGOPOD UNIT
use with Nucleus Display equipment.
5 The Ergopod is designed to be fitted to the end of a
2 Two types of Ergopod are available, these are: chair arm, using a mounting bracket. The dimensions
(1) ERGOPOD - Right-hand (NNR-A18). and fixing holes for both left-hand and right-hand mounting
brackets are shown in Figure 2f.
(2) ERGOPOD - Left-hand (NNR-A18-2).
3 Figure 1f below shows a right-hand Ergopod.
345
190 110
2 HOLES DIA 6
40
24
50
27.5
15.5
2 SLOTS AS FIG 1
19
13.5
20
15
CHAMFER 5x5 6
SLOT AS FIG 3
23 10
16
11.5 FULL RAD 5 FULL RAD
8 FULL RAD BOTH ENDS BOTH ENDS
4
8
BOTH ENDS
3
6
3
6
345
110.0 190
2 HOLES DIA 6
40
50
27.5
15.5
3
6
BOTH ENDS
6
3
(3) Ergopod Controller Kit for 6000 Series Display FIG 1 FIG 2 FIG 3
(NNR-A887-12)
RIGHT-HAND MOUNTING BRACKET
(4) Ergopod Controller Kit for Nucleus 3 Split CD-4662
Processor (NNR-A887-22)
Connections
Dia. 5 mm
12 Display connection cables are 3-core cables
CD-4507
B A B A D35 D36
87 D1
A9
4 3 2 1
SW1
SW2
65
LK1 LK2
CB
43
ED
F0 12
ON
PL7 PL5
D31 POD/422 5 ( SLAB ) 6 ( MFD )
D32
D33
D34
PL2 PL4
1 2 3 4
D5 DISPLAY DISPLAY
D8
PL3
D12
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3
D20 NMEA INTERFACE
D18
PL6
D16
PL1
PL8 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
NMEA INTERFACE
D23
NNR-A589
Download/
diagnostics
CD-4508
Amdt 5
Radar Display
Righthand Pod = NNR-A18
(shown)
INPUT PCB
(NNR-A346)
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-114)
8f.5
SL14-CL-V PLG
Nucleus 5000
PLH
PLH
SL14-CL-V PLF SL12-CL-V PLW
SL4-CL-V
Input PCB
SKO SKP
SL4-CL-V PLB SL10-CL-V PLE SL8-CL-V PLC
L1366 L1366
5V dc 1 Blue
12V dc 2 Yellow
Signal 3 Brown
Ground 4 Orange & Green
CD-4509
July 03
Chap 8f
KH 2020
May 01
Chap 8f
KH 2020
y Di s
pla pla
Dis 5) (4) y
(
8f.6
SW1 SW2
87 4 3 2 1
A9
65
43
B C DE
21 ON
0F
1 2 3 4
Original
Original
Display under control by "Master" at Power ON
(Connect to PL2 DISPLAY 1)
"Slave" will also use this display as default at Power ON
but will not have control until one of the "Pods" moves position
d
opo trol
ve Erg r con
o
Sla see play
t
i l no dis
w l t hi s
"Shared" "Shared" "Shared"
display display display
/
cal " "Sh
a
"Lo cated dis red"
di pla
De isplay y
d
Power (2 core)
8f.7
to Slave PCB
65
65
43
43
B C DE
B C DE
21 ON 21 ON
0F 0F
SW1 (Hex switch)
Set to total number of displays
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 connected to the PCB.
SW2 (DIL switch)
Set 1 to ON (Dual Ergopod)
Master Slave
Ergopod Ergopod
CD-4564
May 01
Chap 8f
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 8f
OPERATION (2) Pressing the plus (+) button increases the range
displayed on the screen.
System Information
Index
A C (Cont.)
Access for Cabling 8-3 Control PCB 7-4
adar 1 and/or Radar 2 Input 8 - 14 Control PCB CTX_A24 7-4
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 8-3 Control Signals 8-5
American Practical Navigator 8-3 Control Switches 8-2
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 7-8 Control Switches 8-2
Azimuth Input Amplitud 8 - 18 Controls and Indicators 8 - 4,8 -15
Azimuth Input Noise Suppression 8 - 18 Converters for Low Ratio Compass PCB 8 -17
Azimuth Inputs 8 - 13
Azimuth Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 8 - 14 D
Azimuth Selection 8 - 18 Data Format 8-3
Azimuth Types 8-7 DC Regulators 8-4
Desktop Control Pod 8 - 19
B Diagnostic Maintenance 8 - 7,8 - 20
Brightness 8 - 16 DIAGNOSTICS 7 - 10
brightness and contrast 8-3 Display A Relays 8-4
BRIGHTNESS control 8 - 15 Display B Relays 8-4
Buffer Amplifiers 8 - 21 Display Characteristics 8-1
Buffer Amplifier Installation 8 - 21 DISPLAY CONNECTION SELECTOR 8-5
Buffer Amplifiers 75 Ohm 8 - 21 Display Control Selector 8-4
Buffer Amplifiers 93 Ohm 8 - 21 Display ON-OFF Sounder 8-1
Divide By 4 PCB 8 - 19
C Divide by Four Wiring Diagram 8 - 29
Cable Connections 8-2 Divide by Four PCB 8 - 11,8 - 29
Cable Installation 8-3 Divide By Four PCB 8 - 4,8 - 10,8 - 11
Cable Screen 8-3 DPT Depth 8-5
Cable Screens 8-2 Dual Display Interswitch Unit 8-4
Change Transmitter Control 8-6 Dual Display Interswitch Unit Parts List 8-8
Checks After Set Up 8-3 Dual Interswitch PCB 8-4
Clock Phase 8 - 16 Dual interswitch Unit 8-1
Colour Temperature 8 - 16
Commissioning 8 - 2,8 - 4 E
Compass PCB Switch Settings 8 - 17 Earthing 8-3
Compass Safe Distances 8-1 Electrical Connections 8 - 2,8 - 3
Connections Required for Electronic Industries Association
Nucleus 6000 Series 8 - 11 Standards (EIA) 8-3
Connections Required for External cables 7-4
Nucleus split 6000a
Series 8 - 11 External Connections To Interfaces 8 - 12
Contrast 8 - 16
CONTRAST control 8 - 15
Amdt. 1 i Sep 01
KH 2020
Index (Chap 7 & 8)
F I (Cont.)
Failure Messages 7 - 10 interswitch configuration 8-2
Fault diagnosis algorithms 7 - 10 Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm 8-7
fault finding 8 - 7,8 - 20,8 - 9 Interswitch Unit (Dimensions & Mounting) 8-1
Fault Finding Algorithm 8 - 20 Interswitch Unit Links 8-2
Flat Panel Display 8-2 Interswitch Unit Potentiometers 8-2
Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): interswitched installations 7-9
Interconnections Diagram 8-9
Interswitching Configurations 8-3
Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70):
Interconnections Diagram 8 - 10
Flat Panel Display System: Parts List 8 - 21 L
Flat Panel Screen Display: Fault Language 8 - 16
Finding Algorithm 8 - 20
LETHAL VOLTAGES 7 - 16
Front Panel Control and Indicators 8 - 15
Link & Switch Setting 8-4
FUNCTION OF LINKS 8 - 18
Link And Switch Settings For Low Ratio Compass PCB 8 - 17
Sep 01 ii Amdt. 1
KH 2020
Index (Chap 7 & 8)
N P (Cont.)
neon indicators 7-9 PRFs 8-7
NMEA COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION 8-1 Processor Unit 8-2
NMEA Port Listener Circuit 8-2 Prompt 8 - 16
NMEA Port Talker Circuit 8-2 Proprietary Format 8-4
Nucleus Display Settings - Commissioning 8 - 15 proprietary messages 8-4
NUCLEUS INTERFACING CHART 8-5 Pulse Inputs Up To 360 per Rev 8 - 14
Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel Display 8-1
Nucleus 7000A 18-inch Display 8-1 Q
Nucleus 7000A 20.1-inch Display 8-1 Query Address Fields 8 - 14
NUCLEUS INTERFACING INSTRUCTIONS 8 - 13
R
O Radar 1 8 - 16
On Screen Display (OSD) Facilities: Radar 1 And/or Radar 2 Inputs 8 - 14
Typical Screen Displays 8 - 18
Radar 2 8 - 16
ON/OFF Sounder (NNR-A65): Installation
Diagram 8 - 11 Radar 2 input 8 - 10
On/Off Sounder Unit 8-2 Radar 2 Inputs 8 - 13
ON/OFF Sounder Unit 8 - 19 Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55):
Dimensions and Mounting 8-2
On-Screen Adjustment Controls 8 - 15
range index error 8-3
On-Screen Adjustment Controls 8 - 15
Receiver Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) 7-7
On-screen Display (OSD) 8 - 15
Relay Banks 8-4
On-screen guidance 8 - 19
Remote Mode 8-6
Operating Instructions 8 - 15
Remote Trackerball 8-2
Operation 8 - 2,8 - 5
Remote Trackerball 8-1
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR
DISPLAYS 8-1 Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod) 8 - 19
OPTIONS Menu 8 - 16 Remote Trackerball DIP Switch Settings 8-3
OSD Ownship Data 8-8 Remote Trackerball Unit (NNR-A10-3):
Installation Diagram 8 - 13
Other Ports Listener Circuit 8-2
Reserved characters 8-4
S T
save the settings 8 - 16 talker identifier 8-3
Select Data from other Transmitter 8-6 Test Equipment 7 - 11
SERVICE Info Box 8 - 17 Testing Procedure 8-1
Setting To Work 8-3 TRANSCEIVER 7-3
SETTING TO WORK 8-3 Transceiver Control Selector Switch 8-3
Settings For Display System PCB 8 - 17 Transmitter Control Selector 8 - 4,8 - 6
Settings On System PCB 8 - 15 trip unit reset button 7-1
Setting-up the monitor 8-3 TTM Target data 8 - 11
Setting-up the Remote Trackerball 8-3
SETUP Menu 8 - 16 U
Signal Switching Relays 8-4 Upmast Transceiver Configuration 7-2
Soft Start Unit 7-1 Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations 7 - 17
SOFT START UNIT 7-9
Soft Start Unit 7-9
V
Software Specification 8-3 VBW Dual Ground/Water Speed (Doppler Log) 8 - 12
Space Requirements 8 - 2,8 - 1 Vertical Position 8 - 16
Specifications 8-2 Vertical Size 8 - 16
Standard NMEA Messages 8-5 VHW Water Speed and Heading 8 - 13
STANDBY Screen - Mimic Diagram 8-6 Video 8-7
Status Circuit 8-5 Video Amplitude Adjustment 8-3
SW1 and SW2 Settings 8 - 15 Video and Sync connections 8 - 21
Switches 8 - 19 Video Signal Circuit 8-5
Switches 8-4 Video Switch Settings 8 -15
Switching Control Circuit 8-5 VTG Actual Track and ground speed 8 -14
Switching On 8-3
W
Sync Delay Pot (RV5) 8-3
Sync Pulse Circuit 8-5 Weight 8-1
Sync Pulses 8-7 WPL Way point Location 8 - 14
Syncro & Resolver Azimuths 8 - 13
Z
System Configurations 8-1
ZDA Time and Date 8 - 14
ZZU: UTC Time (NMEA version 2.00 compliant) 8 - 14
Sep 01 iv Amdt. 1